JP6297728B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. In addition, as an example of a privilege given to a player, a replay game (hereinafter referred to as a “small role”) in which a game medium (medal etc.) is paid out (hereinafter referred to as “small role”) and the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium , “Replay”), and bonus game operations that increase game media payout opportunities.

  In addition, the pachislot with the above configuration is usually provided with an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and a speaker for performing various effects in accordance with the above-described game-related operations. Furthermore, in recent years, as with a game machine called a pachinko machine, a pachislot machine having an accessory driven using a motor or solenoid (hereinafter referred to as a movable accessory) has been proposed as a production device (for example, Patent Document 1).

  Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-133867 proposes a technique for linking an image display operation by a liquid crystal display device and an operation of a movable accessory in order to call a player's attention to an effect display.

JP 2009-261599 A

  As described above, a gaming machine that produces an effect using a movable accessory has been proposed. Note that such an effect using a movable accessory is an effect indicating that the expected value for shifting to a gaming state in which the player is advantageous is relatively high. However, an effect using a movable accessory as proposed in Patent Document 1 is normally completed within one unit game, but a unit game in which an effect using a movable accessory is performed. There may be a situation in which the movable accessory is in operation at the end of the unit game without the end of the production operation. In this case, normally, at the start of the next unit game, the operation of the moving movable object being operated is canceled, so that it is impossible to show the player the effect using the movable combination having a high expected value.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and the object of the present invention is to provide a movable accessory at the end of the unit game without causing the production using the movable accessory to end during the unit game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can show a player an effect using a movable accessory having a high expectation value even when a situation that is in operation occurs.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A movable decorative portion (for example, various movable accessories described later) that performs a predetermined movement operation;
A display device for displaying an image (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later)
A control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 42 described later) that performs control related to the effects of the gaming machine,
The controller is
A specific effect (for example, a “jumping” effect, which will be described later) for moving the movable decorative part from the origin position to the front surface of the display device is determined,
If the next unit game is started before the moving operation of the movable decoration part to the front of the display device is executed in the predetermined unit game in which the specific effect is determined, Triggering the start of a unit game, moving the movable decorative part from the origin position to the front of the display device,
In the predetermined case, the movable decorative portion located on the front surface of the display device is moved to the origin position at a predetermined timing or the start of a unit game as a trigger. .

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the control unit triggers a predetermined operation in the next unit game, and moves the movable decoration unit to the origin position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the trigger. It may be.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, during execution of the next unit game, the game machine is located on the front surface of the display device, which is associated with a predetermined image frame in the effect video displayed by the display device. A movement command information storing means for storing movement command information for moving the movable decorative portion to the origin position;
In the next unit game, when the movement command information stored by the movement command information storage unit is detected in the next unit game, the control unit sets the movable decoration unit to the origin position. You may make it move.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, the effect using the movable decoration part (movable accessory) does not end during the unit game, and the movable accessory becomes active at the end of the unit game. Even if the situation occurs, it is possible to show the player an effect using a movable accessory with a high expectation value. The reason why this effect is obtained will be described in detail in the description of the embodiment described later.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front block diagram of the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front panel in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the right movable unit (right door accessory) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right movable unit (right door accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the door combination movable data table referred by various operation | movement of the right movable unit (right door combination) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the central movable unit (central accessory) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the central movable unit (central accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the central movable unit (central accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the central movable unit (central accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front block diagram of the liquid crystal display device vicinity at the time of completion | finish of popping-out operation | movement of the central movable unit (central accessory) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the central actor movable data table referred by various operation | movement of the central movable unit (central actor) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states (RT0) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for CB (RT0) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table at the time of an irregular pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (except the time of MB action | operation) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (at the time of MB (CB) operation | movement) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table in the continuous lock state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in non-MB) of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the conversion table (in MB) with the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer form in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the table | surface which put together the starting condition and completion | finish condition of each RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (normal) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (During ART) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus completion | finish waiting end) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery (in rocket) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (normal) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART preparation) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (pseudo bonus completion waiting) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of a pseudo | simulation bonus win) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of a pseudo | simulation bonus win) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of a pseudo | simulation bonus win) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of NRB regulation game achievement) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of achievement of regulation game in SRB) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (XBB continuation time) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (the 1) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (the 2) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (the 3) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table in NRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB inside don alignment permission flag table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XBB continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XBB stock table at the time of XBB continuation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB addition top lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB forced shortening lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number addition lottery table (the 1) in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of games during SRB addition lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number addition lottery table (the 3) in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number addition lottery table (the 4) in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number addition lottery table (the 5) in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of games during SRB addition lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number addition lottery table (the 7) in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery game number table lottery table at the time of SRB start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation bonus lottery mode transfer (at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR content lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR addition addition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo bonus lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuation lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transfer lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transfer lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival transfer lottery (in XR) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival addition addition 1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival addition addition 2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode transfer lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode continuation lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the loop lottery table at the time of the ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (During ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transfer table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BG challenge mode transfer table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pushing order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 and don BB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 and don BB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 and don BB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 and don BB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transfer) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (in pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo | simulation bonus) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (normal) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (During ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART end time) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a medal reception and start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the winning number correction process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop button detection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the priority attraction | suction control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus end check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game end effect control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power interruption interruption process of the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the display command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal middle state transition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal process (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART preparation (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of XR discharge | release in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state transition process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 1) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 2) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (the 3) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during XR (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in XRC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the rocket (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the rocket (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in BGZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during BGZ (at the time of winning a prize) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in a confirmation screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (winning) in finalization screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during NRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during XBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a pseudo | simulation bonus completion | finish waiting in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (winning) during pseudo | simulation bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of pseudo | simulation bonus completion | finish (winning time) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory starting test process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows one structural example of the error information history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation | movement monitoring process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation | movement start monitoring process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation | movement start monitoring process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory operation | movement completion monitoring process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the guide menu main process in one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be exemplified as a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of replay is displayed when an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot machine having a function for operating a game state higher than normal, that is, a function for assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) simultaneously operating with a function for replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) will be described. .

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “out of” other than that. Such a thing is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece Set the number to one symbol.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is placed on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 at the time of operation of “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously activates the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and “CB”, which are the second type special feature. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning a prize, a reward such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of gaming operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various effects are performed using it.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as an effect random number value) is extracted in addition to the random number value used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effects related to the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the pachislot of the present embodiment is functionally mainly composed of a main control unit that controls various operations related to the progress of the game and the various operations, a sub-control unit that produces a game, and a main control. And a gaming machine housing for mounting the sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main board) to be described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected thereto. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-board) described later and various peripheral devices (liquid crystal display device, speaker, lamp, various movable accessories, etc.) controlled by the sub-control circuit. Below, the content of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
First, the external structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the pachislot machine 1 near the liquid crystal screen.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine housing). The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed.

  Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 7 on one side surface is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is formed of a concave member, and an operator's hand is put on the handle 7 when carrying the pachislot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 to be described later, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display devices) are provided in the cabinet 2a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in the horizontal direction (reel). In a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction). Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction), and the symbols adjacent to each other along the symbol arrangement direction are arranged at predetermined intervals. The

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3), and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 (display device, notification means) is attached to the upper part of the door main body 9 and performs an effect by displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit including three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. Display screen) 11a. In the present embodiment, video is displayed using the entire display unit 11a including the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, and an effect is executed.

  The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate, for example. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the three reel arrangement regions when viewed from the front (player side), and are positioned in front of the three reels (player side). To be provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

  In the present embodiment, each display window is arranged in succession among a plurality of symbols (arranged) drawn (arranged) on each reel when rotation of a corresponding reel provided behind the display window stops. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. Therefore, in the frame of each display window, as shown in FIG. 3, there are provided upper, middle and lower symbol display areas for each reel (hereinafter referred to as upper area, middle area and lower area, respectively), One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. That is, the symbols are displayed in the 3 × 3 array form on the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. In this embodiment, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. To do.

  The front panel 10 is attached so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display unit 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the upper part of the door main body 9, and is disposed so as to overlap the front side surface of the display unit 11a. The The front panel 10 includes a decorative frame 101 in which a panel opening 101 a that exposes a necessary display screen area in the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is formed, and a transparent protective cover 102 that covers the panel opening 101 a of the decorative frame 101. (See FIG. 2).

  The decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R (hereinafter referred to as a left effect switch 22L and a right effect switch 22R).

  The lamp group 21 includes, for example, a lamp 21a provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 and a lamp 21b provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 3). Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the left effect switch 22L is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and at the lower left corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. Be placed. On the other hand, the right effect switch 22R is provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is disposed at the lower right corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. Note that the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R are switches that are selected and pressed by the player during an alternative effect referred to as a “billy get challenge” described later.

  Furthermore, a plurality of movable accessories (movable decoration portions) are attached to the decorative frame 101. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, and a right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101 as movable accessories.

  The central movable unit 105 is disposed in the central portion near the upper end in the decorative frame 101 and has a movable component 309. The central movable unit 105 is driven and controlled, for example, when a specific effect is performed, and the movable component 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) is moved to a substantially central position on the front surface of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Moving. The configuration of the central movable unit 105 and the rendering operation using the central movable unit 105 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  The left movable unit 106 is disposed near the left end in the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188. The right movable unit 107 is disposed near the right end in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189. When a predetermined effect is performed using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, drive control is performed so that the left door 188 and the right door 189 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) are opened. The configuration of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, and the rendering operation using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, an example in which the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are driven simultaneously will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is driven. An effect operation that is controlled may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the lumbar panel 12 is provided substantially at the center of the door body 9, and a pedestal portion 13 is formed on the lumbar panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, checkout button 18, A SELECT button 19A, an ENTER button 19B, etc.) are provided.

  The medal slot 14 is provided to accept a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three) set in advance, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number are deposited inside the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided for determining the number of cards used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Further, the checkout button 18 is provided to draw out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The SELECT button 19A and the ENTER button 19B are mainly used to display various guide information such as a guide menu on the display unit 11a (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display device 11, and to select a predetermined menu item from the guide menu. In doing so, it is pressed down by the player.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 5) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is digitally displayed.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. The two speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1, and is a view showing a state when the front door 2b is opened with respect to the cabinet 2a.

  The cabinet 2a is configured by a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member having one surface on the front side (front door 2b side) opened.

  Near the upper end in the cabinet 2a, a main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 5) to be described later is mounted is provided. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of the presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

  A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R is provided near the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 4, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 5) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  Near the lower end in the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided. In addition, near the lower end in the cabinet 2a, on one side of the hopper 33 (on the left side in the example shown in FIG. 4) is provided a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1. It is done.

  A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) to be described later is mounted is provided in the vicinity of the upper end on the back side (the side opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub-control circuit 42 (sub-control means) receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and determines the effect of the game by displaying the video based on the received command data. It is a circuit that controls the operation of the production. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided in the vicinity of the substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) is appropriate. To guide. Although not shown in FIG. 4, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 5) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Configuration of circuits provided in pachislot>
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  Connected to the main CPU 51 are a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56 and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and various sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R. In order to simplify the explanation, although not shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, the SELECT switch for detecting that the SELECT button 19A is pressed by the player and the ENTER button 19B are pressed by the player. An ENTER switch is also provided to detect that it has been operated.

  The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed (stop operation) by the player. The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B) has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35.

  Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50 include three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variable display devices), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display unit drive circuit 64 and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to an input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs a detection result to the microcomputer 50.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels the number of symbols is). Only managed).

  Here, a method for managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “1”. "Is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not medals discharged from the hopper 33 have reached a predetermined payout number. To do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . The sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, an amplifier 93, various movable unit drive circuits (movable decoration unit drive units), and a rotation. A lamp driving circuit 99 is included. In this embodiment, the movable unit drive circuit is provided for each movable accessory, and the central movable unit drive circuit 96, the left movable unit drive circuit 97, and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 are composed of the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit. 106 and the right movable unit 107 are provided correspondingly.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a production random number value, and determination of production contents (production data). An effect registration task for performing registration, an animation task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker 20L , 20R includes a sound control task for controlling sound output, and a role control task for driving and controlling various movable accessories (central movable unit 105, left movable unit 106 and right movable unit 107). It is.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and BGM (Back-Ground Music) Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data relating to sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to light on / off patterns, and a storage area for storing accessory movable data relating to operation patterns of various movable accessories included.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents of the effect, the effect data, and the like, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 42 includes the liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L and 20R, a lamp group 21, a left effect switch 22L, a right effect switch 22R, a central movable unit 105, and a left movable unit. 106, a right movable unit 107, and peripheral devices such as a rotating lamp 124 are connected. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and the created video is generated by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

  The sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the D / A converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data designated by the contents of the production. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data specified by the production contents. The sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 in accordance with the left movable unit drive data designated by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the rotating lamp driving circuit 99 drive the rotating lamp 124 in accordance with the rotating lamp driving data designated by the contents of the effect.

  In addition, each movable unit drive circuit may be comprised separately by the accessory control board. Also in this case, when the movable unit is driven, the movable unit drive circuit (the accessory control board) is based on the control data (the accessory movable data) input from the sub CPU 81, and the corresponding movable unit (provided in the interior) is provided. Stepping motor) is driven and controlled. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 may directly drive and control each movable unit.

  Further, the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R each detect that the player has pressed the switch, and transmit the detection result to a sub-control circuit 42 described later.

<Configuration and operation of each movable unit>
In the present embodiment, various effects are performed using the movable combination of the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107. Here, the configuration and operation of each movable unit (movable accessory) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the front panel 10. As shown in FIG. 7, the front panel 10 includes a decorative frame 101 in which a panel opening 101 a that exposes a display screen area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is formed, and a transparent protective cover 102 that closes the panel opening 101 a of the decorative frame 101. Have A central movable unit 105 is provided in the center of the upper frame portion in the decorative frame 101, a left movable unit 106 is provided in the left frame portion in the decorative frame 101, and a right frame portion in the decorative frame 101 is provided in the right frame portion. A right movable unit 107 is provided.

[Configuration of right movable unit (left movable unit)]
First, with reference to FIG.8 and FIG.9, the structure of the right movable unit 107 (right door accessory) is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the right movable unit 107, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the right movable unit 107. Note that the configuration of the left movable unit 106 (left door accessory) is symmetrical to that of the right movable unit 107, and its components are the same as those of the right movable unit 107. Description of is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the right movable unit 107 includes an upper cover 134, a door main body 135, and a door drive mechanism 136.

  The upper cover 134 is disposed above the door body 135 and is fixed to the upper frame portion of the decorative frame 101. Further, the upper cover 134 is disposed so as to cover the upper portion of the door drive mechanism 136.

  The door main body 135 includes a right door 189 and a rotation shaft 231 provided on the right side of the door main body 135 and extending in the vertical direction. The right door 189 is attached to the door drive mechanism 136 so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 231. At the time of a predetermined performance using the right movable unit 107, the surface of the left side of the right door 189 (the surface opposite to the rotation shaft 231 side: hereinafter referred to as the exterior side surface portion 189b) faces the player side. The right door 189 rotates about the rotation shaft 231 (see FIGS. 10 to 12 described later).

  The door drive mechanism 136 includes a case 251 and a bearing fixing portion 252 that is fixed to the case 251. The door driving mechanism 136 is a mechanism that generates a driving force for rotating the right door 189 and transmits the driving force to the rotating shaft 231. Therefore, the case 251 of the door drive mechanism 136 includes various drive parts (not shown) such as a stepping motor and a gear for driving the rotation shaft 231.

  Further, although not shown, a right door accessory origin sensor (origin discrimination means) is provided in the case 251 of the door drive mechanism 136. This right door accessory sensor is a sensor provided to determine (detect) whether or not the right door 189 is located at the initial position (origin position). When the right door 189 is disposed at the initial position (origin position) (when the right door 189 is in the retracted state), the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is turned on, and the right door 189 is If it is not arranged at the initial position (when the right door 189 is in operation), the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is turned off. In the present embodiment, the left door accessory origin for determining (detecting) whether or not the left door 188 is disposed at the initial position (storage position) also in the door drive mechanism of the left movable unit 106. A sensor (origin discrimination means) is provided.

[Operation of right movable unit]
Next, the operation of the right movable unit 107 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 are front views of the right movable unit 107, and are diagrams showing the state of the operation process when the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 is fully opened (100% open) from the initial position. In the production using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the operation of the left movable unit 106 is bilaterally symmetric with the operation of the right movable unit 107. Therefore, only the operation of the right movable unit 107 will be described here. Description of the operation of the movable unit 106 is omitted.

  First, at the start of a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the right movable unit 105 is placed at the initial position (origin position) as shown in FIG. In this state, the exterior front portion 189a on which the leaf pattern of the right door 189 is drawn faces the player.

  Next, when a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is started, the right door 189 is driven by the door drive mechanism 136, and the right door 189 rotates about the rotation shaft 231. . At this time, as shown in FIG. 11, the right door 189 rotates about the rotation shaft 231 so that the exterior side surface portion 189b of the right door 189 faces the player side (in the direction of arrow R1 in FIG. 11). To do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12, when the right door 189 rotates and moves to a position where the exterior side surface 189b of the right door 189 faces the player, the movement of the right door 189 stops (the right door 189 is fully opened). State). In such a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the size of the liquid crystal screen exposed between the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 increases when the door is open.

  Next, at the end of a predetermined effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107, the right door 189 returns from the fully opened state shown in FIG. 12 to the initial state shown in FIG. Driven by rotation. At this time, the door drive mechanism 136 rotationally drives the right door 189 in the direction opposite to the rotational drive direction when the right door 189 is opened.

[Structure of movable data for door actors]
Next, referring to FIG. 13, the structure of the accessory movable data (hereinafter referred to as door accessory movable data) used when the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are driven by the stepping motor in the door drive mechanism. Will be described. FIG. 13 shows a door accessory movable data table. The door accessory movable data table shows the correspondence between the types of operations of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 and the application pattern data (door accessory movable data) of the excitation pulse to the corresponding stepping motor. It is a specified table.

  In the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13, the operation types of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are “startup test”, “open”, “close”, “back”, “10 open”, “10 closed”. ”,“ 20 open ”,“ 20 close ”,“ 30 open ”,“ 30 close ”,“ 40 open ”and“ 40 close ”are defined. Further, the numerical value described in the pulse width column in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 is the value of the ON state period of the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor, and one period (period) of the excitation pulse including ON and OFF. ) Is twice the numerical value described in the pulse width column. For example, when the numerical value described in the pulse width column is 3 msec, one period (cycle) of the excitation pulse including ON and OFF is 6 msec.

  Further, “H” in the direction column in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 means that the open / closed state of the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is maintained. “−” Described in the direction column in the door accessory movable data table means a direction in which the right door 189 is opened (R1 direction in the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 12) or a direction in which the left door 188 is closed. "Means the direction in which the right door 189 is closed (in the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the direction opposite to the R1 direction) or the direction in which the left door 188 is opened. Furthermore, the numerical value described in the number column in the door accessory movable data table in FIG. 13 is the number of excitation pulses counted.

  The door accessory movable data defined in the “activation test” in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 is used in the activation test of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 performed when the pachislot 1 is activated. . The door accessory movable data defined as “open” in FIG. 13 indicates that the left door 188 of the left movable unit 106 and the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 are fully opened from the initial position (state of FIG. 10) (FIG. 10). 12 state) (when each door is rotated 90 degrees). Further, the door accessory movable data defined as “close” in FIG. 13 is used when the right door 189 and the left door 188 in the fully opened state are returned to the initial positions.

  The door accessory movable data defined in “Backlash” in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 periodically repeats an operation of opening and closing each door of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107. Used for production (vibration production). The door accessory movable data defined as “10 open” in FIG. 13 is used when each door is opened 10% (when each door is rotated and moved in the direction to open 10%). Further, the door accessory movable data defined as “10 closed” in FIG. 13 is used when each door is closed by 10% (when each door is rotated in a direction to close each door by 10%).

  Here, for example, 10% of the rotational movement of each door is converted to 100% when each door is rotationally moved between the initial position and the fully opened position. In addition, the effects of the rotational movement of “back”, “10 open” to “40 open”, and “10 close” to “40 close” are the initial positions of the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107. Alternatively, it is executed not only when it exists at the fully open position but also when it exists at a predetermined position between the initial position and the fully open position.

  Here, as an example, the correspondence between the door accessory movable data defined in “Open” in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 and each operation state shown in FIGS. explain.

  In the state in which the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are housed in the initial positions, the door accessory movable data defined as “open” in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. 13 was used. When the effect production starts, first, each door is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 120 msec (pulse period 240 msec) is counted once. The state of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 10 corresponds to this hold operation state.

  Next, until the excitation pulse with a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted five times, the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are rotated and moved in a direction to open the doors. Next, the door is further rotated in the direction of opening each door until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 3 msec (pulse period 6 msec) is counted 50 times. The state in the middle of the rotation of the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 11 corresponds to the state of the rotational movement operation.

  Next, the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are further rotated in the direction of opening the doors until the excitation pulse having a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted five times. As a result, each door is in a fully open state (a state where the door is rotated 90 degrees from the initial position). Thereafter, each door is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (pulse period 200 msec) is counted once. The state of the right movable unit 107 shown in FIG. 12 corresponds to this hold operation state.

[Special processing related to the performance of door objects]
(1) Forced storage processing of door accessory In the effect using the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 (door accessory) of the present embodiment, it is defined as “close” in the door accessory movable data table of FIG. As shown in the door function movable data, when returning each door from the fully open position to the initial position, the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor of each door, excluding the hold operation of each door 60 pulses (5 + 50 + 5 pulses) until each door is rotated until it is counted.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the operation of closing each door (the operation in the “* 1” column of “close”, “10 close”, “20 close”, “30 close”, and “40 close” in FIG. 13). If each door does not return to the initial position even when the corresponding door accessory movement data is executed to the end (when the detection result of the accessory origin sensor of each door is in the OFF state), an excitation pulse is further generated. Each door is rotationally moved in the closing direction until 60 pulses are counted. That is, if each door does not return to the initial position even when the door accessory movable data is executed to the end in the operation of closing each door, the accessory is further rotated by 60 pulses in the direction of closing each door. Movable data (hereinafter referred to as door accessory origin return auxiliary data) is additionally supplied to each door accessory.

  At this time, when the type of the closing operation is “10 closing”, “20 closing”, “30 closing”, or “40 closing”, the pulse width of the excitation pulse is 10 msec and the closing operation type is “close”. In this case, the pulse width of the excitation pulse is 4 msec. The pulse width of the excitation pulse when the type of closing operation is “closed” is the same as when the type of closing operation is “10 closed”, “20 closed”, “30 closed”, or “40 closed”. Alternatively, it may be 10 msec.

  By performing the door accessory origin return auxiliary data addition process described above, each door can be forcibly returned to the initial position in the operation of closing each door. In this case, even if the drive mechanism such as a solenoid or a motor for driving each door of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 is deteriorated, each door is returned to the initial position (origin position) by uniform processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize the obstacle to the next production.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the number of excitation pulses in the door accessory origin return auxiliary data is 60 pulses has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any number of pulses can be adopted as long as the number of pulses can forcibly return each door to the initial position. Further, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the door accessory origin return auxiliary data is not limited to the above example, and can be changed as appropriate. At this time, the number of excitation pulses may be changed as appropriate according to the pulse width of the excitation pulse employed.

(2) Guide menu display prohibition process when door accessory is activated In the present embodiment, the player selects the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B provided on the front door 2b while the game is not being executed (after the third stop). The guide menu is displayed on the display unit 11a (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display device 11b. FIG. 14 shows an example of a guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the player selects a menu item in the guide menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 ("unimemo", "arrangement / payout", "go to dedicated site" or "return to game"), the display screen is selected. Switches to the screen corresponding to the menu item.

  In the present embodiment, when the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 (door accessory) are operating during the non-game after the third stop, the player presses the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B. Even if it is, the guide menu display is prohibited. In this case, the guide menu is displayed after each door of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 returns to the initial position.

  By performing the above-described guide menu display prohibition process when the door accessory is activated, it is possible to prevent the guide menu from overlapping the door accessory as viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to display the guide menu under simple conditions without causing discomfort to the player.

[Configuration of central movable unit]
Next, the configuration of the central movable unit 105 (central accessory) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the central movable unit 105.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the central movable unit 105 includes a support member 301, a decorative movable member 302, a rack member 303, and a drive mechanism 304.

  The support member 301 is fixed to the upper frame portion of the decorative frame 101 using a fixing member such as a screw. Although not shown, the support member 301 is provided with a central accessory origin sensor (origin discrimination means). The central accessory origin sensor determines whether or not a movable decorative cover 323 (described later) in the decorative movable member 302 is disposed at the initial position (origin position) (the decorative movable member 302 is in the storage state shown in FIG. 15). It is a sensor provided to determine (detect). When a movable decorative cover 323, which will be described later, is arranged at the initial position (origin position), the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is turned on, and when the movable decorative cover 323 is not arranged at the initial position (center) When the accessory is in operation), the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is turned off.

  The decorative movable member 302 includes a rotation base 321, a slide base 322, a movable decorative cover 323, and an arch cover 324.

  The movable decorative cover 323 is a decorative member in which the head of the character “Billy” is mainly formed in three dimensions on the surface. The movable decorative cover 323 is attached on the rotation base 321 and the slide base 322. In addition, the movable decorative cover 323 is housed in the lower part of the arch cover 324 as shown in FIG. 15 in a normal time (in an initial state).

  The arch cover 324 is a semi-cylindrical plate-like member, and is attached on the rotation base 321. It should be noted that a predetermined pattern (mainly the letter “po” in the present embodiment) and a pattern are three-dimensionally formed on the upper surface (outer peripheral surface) of the arch cover 324.

  The rack member 303 has a decorative cover 364 having a three-dimensionally mainly back portion of the character “Billy” on the surface (see FIGS. 16 to 19 described later). The rack member 303 is attached to the support member 301. Further, the rack member 303 is disposed behind the decorative movable member 302 in a state where the movable decorative cover 323 is disposed at the initial position (the state shown in FIG. 15), and is disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The drive mechanism 304 is a drive device for rotating and slidingly moving the movable decorative cover 323. Therefore, the drive mechanism 304 includes various drive components (not shown) such as a stepping motor, a gear group, and a rotary shaft for rotating and sliding the movable decorative cover 323.

[Operation of central movable unit]
Next, an example of the rendering operation using the central movable unit 105 (central accessory) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 are perspective views of the central movable unit 105, and are diagrams illustrating the state of each operation process during a specific performance using the central movable unit 105. FIG. 19 is a front view of the front panel 10 when a specific effect using the central movable unit 105 is completed.

  In a specific effect using the central movable unit 105 described here, first, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are rotated approximately 90 degrees from the initial position (the state of FIG. 15) (the state of FIG. 17), and thereafter Then, the movable decorative cover 323 is slid and moved downward (state shown in FIG. 18). Hereinafter, this specific effect is referred to as a “jumping” effect of the movable decorative cover 323.

  First, at the start of the “jumping” effect using the central movable unit 105, the movable decorative cover 323 is placed (stored) at the initial position (origin position) as shown in FIG. In a state where the movable decorative cover 323 is disposed at the initial position, the tip of the movable decorative cover 323 is directed forward (player side), and the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 is directed upward.

  Next, when the “jumping” effect is started, the rotation base 321 in the decorative movable member 302 is moved in the direction of the arrow R4 in the figure by the rotational drive of the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304 as shown in FIG. It rotates and moves (so that the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 faces the player side). As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 installed on the rotation base 321 also rotate and move in the direction of the arrow R4 in the drawing as shown in FIG. As the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 rotate, the decorative cover 364 provided on the rack member 303 is gradually exposed.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are rotated 90 degrees from the initial position, the rotational movement operation of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 is finished. As a result, the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 is disposed at a position facing the player, and the decorative cover 364 provided on the rack member 303 is completely exposed on the upper portion of the arch cover 324. At this time, the movable decorative cover 323 is housed behind the arch cover 324.

  Next, in a state where the rotational movement operation of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 has been completed, when the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304 further rotates, the slide base 322 in the decorative movable member 302 slides downward. . As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 installed on the slide base 322 also slides downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 18, when the movable decorative cover 323 protrudes downward from the arch cover 324, the sliding movement of the movable decorative cover 323 is finished, and the “jumping” effect using the central movable unit 105 is achieved. The operation is also terminated.

  In the state where the sliding movement of the movable decorative cover 323 has been completed, the movable decorative cover 323 is disposed between the left door 188 of the left movable unit 106 and the right door 189 of the right movable unit 107 as shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed at the approximate center in front of the display unit 11a. As a result, at the end of the “jumping” effect using the central movable unit 105, the head of the character “Billy” drawn in three dimensions on the surface of the movable decorative cover 323 and the three-dimensional drawing on the outer peripheral surface of the arch cover 324 are drawn. The predetermined pattern and pattern and the back portion of the character “Billy” drawn three-dimensionally on the surface of the decorative cover 364 are visible to the player on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Composition of central actor movement data]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the structure of the accessory movable data (hereinafter referred to as the central accessory movable data) used when the central movable unit 105 is driven by the stepping motor in the drive mechanism 304 will be described. FIG. 20 shows a central actor movable data table. The central actor movable data table is a table that defines the correspondence between the type of operation of the central movable unit 105 and the application pattern data of the excitation pulse to the corresponding stepping motor (central actor movable data). .

  In the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20, five types of “start-up test”, “pop-out”, “storage”, “vibration”, and “small jump-out” are defined as the operation types of the central movable unit 105. Further, the numerical value described in the pulse width column in the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20 is the value of the on state period of the excitation pulse applied to the stepping motor, and is one period (period) of the excitation pulse including on and off. ) Is twice the numerical value described in the pulse width column. For example, when the numerical value described in the pulse width column is 4 msec, one period (cycle) of the excitation pulse including ON and OFF is 8 msec.

  Further, “H” described in the direction column in the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20 means that the state of the decorative movable member 302 (movable decorative cover 323) is maintained. “−” Described in the direction column in the central actor movable data table means a direction in which the movable decorative cover 323 projects from the initial position (projecting direction: R4 direction in FIGS. 16 and 17), and “+” means “+”. This means the direction in which the movable decorative cover 323 is returned to the initial position (storage direction: the direction opposite to the R4 direction in FIGS. 16 and 17). Furthermore, the numerical value described in the number column in the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20 is the number of excitation pulses counted.

  The central actor movable data defined in the “activation test” in the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20 is used in the activation test of the central movable unit 105 performed when the pachislot 1 is activated. Further, the central actor movable data defined in “Jump out” in FIG. 20 is used when performing the operation of “Jump out” effect described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the central actor movable data defined in “storage” in FIG. 20 is the state when the movable decorative cover 323 is “popped out” at the end of the effect (the movable decorative cover 323 has jumped out of the arch cover 324: FIG. 18). This is used when returning to the initial position from the position of (1).

  Further, the central actor movable data defined in “vibration” in FIG. 20 is an effect (vibration effect) that periodically repeats the operation of moving the movable decorative cover 323 in the pop-out direction and the operation of moving it in the storage direction. Used in The movement operation of “vibration” is executed not only when the movable decorative cover 323 is present at the initial position or the position at the end of the “jumping” effect, but also when it is present at a predetermined position between the two positions. Is done. Further, the central actor movable data defined in “Small pop-out” in FIG. 20 indicates that the movable decorative cover 323 is moved in the pop-out direction with a smaller pop-out amount than the “jump-out” effect, and then the movable decorative cover 323 is moved. This is used when performing an effect of returning the initial position.

  Here, as an example, the correspondence between the central actor movable data defined in “jump out” in the central actor movable data table of FIG. 20 and each operation state shown in FIGS. explain.

  In a state where the central movable unit 105 (movable decorative cover 323 and arch cover 324) is housed in the initial position, the central actor movable data defined in “jump” in the central actor movable data table of FIG. When the used effect production is started, first, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (pulse period 200 msec) is counted once. The state of the central movable unit 105 (movable decorative cover 323 and arch cover 324) shown in FIG. 15 corresponds to this hold operation state.

  Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are rotated and moved in the popping-out direction (the direction of the arrow R4 in FIG. 16) until the excitation pulse with a pulse width of 7 msec (pulse period 14 msec) is counted seven times. Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are further rotated in the protruding direction until an excitation pulse having a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted 18 times. The state during the rotation of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 shown in FIG. 16 corresponds to the state of the rotational movement operation.

  Next, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 are further rotated in the protruding direction until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 6 msec (pulse period 12 msec) is counted seven times. As a result, the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 rotate 90 degrees from the initial position, and the state at the end of the rotational movement of the movable decorative cover 323 and the arch cover 324 shown in FIG. 17 is generated.

  Next, an operation of sliding the movable decorative cover 323 downward is started. First, the stepping motor is further rotationally driven in the protruding direction of the movable decorative cover 323 until an excitation pulse having a pulse width of 4 msec (pulse period 8 msec) is counted once.

  Next, the stepping motor is further rotationally driven in the protruding direction of the movable decorative cover 323 until the excitation pulse (pulse period 6 msec) having a pulse width of 3 msec is counted 82 times. By the rotational drive of these stepping motors, the slide base 322 slides downward, and the movable decorative cover 323 also slides downward. As a result, a state in which the movable decorative cover 323 protrudes below the arch cover 324 is generated.

  Thereafter, the movable decorative cover 323 is held until an excitation pulse with a pulse width of 100 msec (pulse period 200 msec) is counted once. The state at the end of the sliding movement of the movable decorative cover 323 shown in FIG. 18 corresponds to the state of the hold operation.

[Special processing related to the production of central actors]
(1) Forced storage processing of central role In the production using the central movable unit 105 (central role) of the present embodiment, the central role defined in “Storage” in the central role movable data table of FIG. As shown in the object movement data, when the movable decorative cover 323 is returned from the position at the end of the “jumping” effect (the state in FIG. 18) to the initial position, the stepping of the central movable unit 105 is performed except for the holding operation. The movable decorative cover 323 is moved in the storage direction (sliding and rotating) until the excitation pulse applied to the motor is counted 115 pulses (60 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 19 + 30 pulses).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the operation of storing the movable decorative cover 323 (the operation in the “* 2” column of “storage” and “small pop-out” in FIG. 20), the corresponding central actor movable data is executed to the end. However, if the movable decorative cover 323 does not return to the initial position (when the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is in the OFF state), the movable decorative cover 323 is further increased until 115 excitation pulses are counted. Is moved in the storage direction. That is, if the movable decorative cover 323 does not return to the initial position even when the central accessory movable data is executed to the end in the operation of storing the movable decorative cover 323, the movable decorative cover 323 is further moved 115 pulses in the storage direction. Accordingly, the movable article movable data to be moved (hereinafter referred to as the central bonus point return auxiliary data) is additionally supplied to the central movable unit 105. At this time, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the central accessory origin return auxiliary data is 12 msec.

  By executing the above-described process of adding the central accessory origin return auxiliary data, the movable decorative cover 323 can be forcibly returned to the initial position in the operation of storing the movable decorative cover 323. In this case, even if the driving mechanism such as a solenoid or a motor for driving the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 (central accessory) is deteriorated, the movable decorative cover 323 is uniformly processed by the uniform processing. Since the position can be returned to (position), it is possible to minimize the hindrance to the next performance.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the number of excitation pulses in the central character origin return auxiliary data is 115 pulses has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any number of pulses can be employed as long as the number of pulses can forcibly return the movable decorative cover 323 to the initial position. Further, the pulse width of the excitation pulse in the central accessory origin return auxiliary data is not limited to the above example, and can be changed as appropriate. At this time, the number of excitation pulses may be changed as appropriate according to the pulse width of the excitation pulse employed.

(2) Special processing when the next game is started during the “jumping out” effect of the central role The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is after the third stop of the stop button (after detecting the OFF edge of the third stop operation). An effect function of causing the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to appear on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, a function of executing an “out” effect of the central movable unit 105 (see FIGS. 15 to 18). Prepare. Such a “jumping out” effect of the central movable unit 105 (central character) is an effect indicating that the gaming state has a relatively high expectation value for shifting to a gaming state in which the player is advantageous.

  However, in the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105 that is performed after the stop button is stopped for the third time (after the OFF edge of the third stop operation is detected), the movable decorative cover 323 jumps out to the front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 There is a case where the start operation of the next game (ON operation of the start lever 16) is performed before (before the movable decorative cover 323 falls to the front surface of the liquid crystal screen).

  When such a situation occurs, in this embodiment, the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105 is not canceled during the start operation of the next game (when a start command is received) without canceling the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105. Perform the production. Therefore, when the above situation occurs, after the start operation of the next game, the movable decorative cover 323 protrudes to the front surface of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is in the off state).

  Then, after the start operation of the next game, the operation (retraction operation) of returning the movable decorative cover 323 that has jumped to the front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 to the initial position is performed after the third stop of the stop button of the next game (display command reception). This is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time) or when the game is started one after another (when a start command is received). At the former timing, the call sign for designating the central agent storage instruction associated with a predetermined image frame in the effect video data used in the video display effect of the liquid crystal display device 11 performed in the next game. Based on the data detection, the storage operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is started. Further, at the latter timing, the storing operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is started in response to detection of reception of game start commands one after another.

  Here, the operation of detecting the call sign data (movement command information) for specifying the central accessory storage instruction will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, when the “moving out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after the OFF edge of the third stop operation is detected, the “moving out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is considered in consideration of the occurrence of the above situation. In a predetermined image frame from the time of detecting the OFF edge of the third stop operation in the sequence data of the effect video displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the next game to be played (hereinafter referred to as effect sequence data) to the end of the game, Call sign data (hereinafter referred to as an accessory storing call sign) for designating a central accessory storing instruction is provided in association (attached).

  Then, during playback of the video of the next game (video that has nothing to do with the “jumping out” effect of the central movable unit 105), the image frame associated with the call sign for storing an accessory designated by the central accessory storage instruction is reproduced. Then, at that time, a call sign for storing a central character specified by the central character storage instruction is detected by the sub CPU 81 and stored in a predetermined call sign storage area provided in the sub RAM 83. Therefore, in a situation where the “moving” effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after the OFF edge of the third stop operation is detected, the next game start operation is performed before the movable decorative cover 323 jumps to the front of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. When a third stop operation of the next game is detected (when a display command is received), a call sign for storing an accessory designated by the central accessory storage instruction is stored in the call sign storage area after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the game is started or one after another game start operation (when a start command is received) and there is no registered accessory data, the storing operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the start operation of the next game is performed before the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105 after the OFF edge of the third stop operation is detected, the third stop operation of the next game is performed. Although an example in which the storage operation of the movable decorative cover 323 is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the OFF edge, or at the time of a game start operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information for designating the timing for performing a storing operation may be included in a call sign for storing an accessory designated by a central accessory storing instruction, and the storing operation may be performed at a timing corresponding to the information.

  By performing the special processing at the time of the “jumping out” effect of the central movable unit 105 (central object) as described above, it is possible to reliably notify the effect with a high expected value without hindering the player's operation.

<Error detection processing for movable objects>
The pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment has various functions for monitoring the operating state of each movable accessory. Here, the error detection processing of each movable accessory (the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107) performed at the time of starting and at the time of starting the unit game (when receiving the start command) will be described. To do.

  In the error detection processing of the movable accessory at the time of starting and at the start operation of the unit game performed in this embodiment, whether or not the detection result of the accessory origin sensor of each movable accessory is in the on state (each movable accessory Whether or not has returned to the origin position), and it is determined that an error has occurred if it is not on. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not each movable accessory is located at the origin position (initial position) using the accessory origin sensor of each movable accessory. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any device can be used as long as it can determine whether or not each movable accessory is located at the origin position (initial position).

  Further, when an error occurrence of a movable accessory is detected in the error detection process at the time of activation, the error occurrence information is registered in an error information history (see FIG. 317 described later). On the other hand, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game, when the error occurrence at the start operation has continued for a predetermined number of times in a predetermined movable accessory (continuous over the predetermined number of games) In the case where an error has occurred, the driving of the predetermined movable accessory is prohibited (non-movable). At this time, information indicating that the driving of the predetermined movable accessory is prohibited (the accessory error stop information) is registered in the error information history.

  In addition, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game, if the driving of the movable accessory is prohibited due to the occurrence of an error once or twice, the variation of each product (game machine), the aging of the movable accessory, etc. The possibility of false detection increases due to the influence of. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive error detections that prohibit the driving of the movable accessory is increased too much, there is a high possibility that the movable accessory will fail before the driving of the movable accessory is prohibited. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the balance between protection of the movable accessory and prevention of erroneous detection, the occurrence of the error of the movable accessory is detected at the start operation continuously over five games. In this case, the driving of the movable accessory is prohibited (made non-movable).

  However, the number of consecutive error detections that prohibit the driving of the movable accessory is not limited to five, and can be appropriately changed in consideration of the durability of the movable accessory, for example. In this embodiment, the number of consecutive error detections that prohibits the driving of the movable combination is set to 5 regardless of the type of the movable combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable combination is not limited to this. You may change the continuous frequency | count of the error detection which prohibits a drive of an object for every kind of movable accessory.

  Further, the number of consecutive occurrences of errors in the movable combination during the start operation of the unit game is counted by an error counter for each movable combination provided in the sub RAM 83. Specifically, the number of consecutive error occurrences of the central movable unit 105 (central accessory) at the start of the unit game operation is counted by the central accessory error counter, and the left movable unit 106 (left door accessory) is counted. The number of consecutive error occurrences is counted by the left door accessory error counter, and the number of consecutive error occurrences of the right movable unit 107 (right door accessory) is counted by the right door accessory error counter (described later). 320 and FIG. 321, refer to the accessory operation start monitoring process).

  By performing the error detection processing of the movable combination as described above, the movable combination can be protected more easily. Further, in this embodiment, error occurrence information at startup and accessory error stop information are registered in the error information history (see FIG. 317 described later), so a hall menu (menu displayed by setting confirmation) or a simple menu In the error information history screen (menu displayed by turning the door key counterclockwise), the operation state (error occurrence state) of the movable accessory can be easily confirmed. In this case, based on the error information history, the pachislot 1 can be maintained at an early stage, and a fatal failure of the movable accessory can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game, error information (combined object error stop information) is detected only when an error of the movable accessory is detected at the start operation for five consecutive times. Is registered in the error information history, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the error detection process at the start operation of the unit game as well as the accessory error stop information, the error occurrence information may be registered in the error information history as in the error detection process at the time of activation.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 21)) that identifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol positioned in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, the symbol counter value “0” corresponds to the symbol counter value in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “20” to symbol position “0” in FIG. 21). “0” to “20” are assigned to the symbols as symbol positions.

  That is, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table. Can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in each of the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L within the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “REP1”, the symbol “BEL1” at the symbol position “7”, and the symbol “WML1” at the symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 29, the symbol combination table (No. 1 to No. 8) will be described. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the symbol combination table includes not only a symbol combination related to a bonus (bonus, medal payout, replay) but also a symbol that triggers when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. The combination (refer to the symbol combination related to the code name “KB01” (transfer to G_RT1) in FIG. 22) is also described as a display combination.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and replaying (replaying). In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a later-described display combination storage area (see FIG. 58 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 62 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination (G_15 bell_3) associated with any of the code names “BL01” to “BL03” is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted three medals. , 15 medals are paid out (see FIGS. 27 and 28). Also, for example, when the display combination (G_14 bells) related to the code name “BM01” is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted 3 medals, 14 medals are paid out ( (See FIG. 28).

  In this embodiment, for example, when a display combination related to replay is determined as a display combination (for example, a symbol combination of the code name “Z001” in FIG. 22 (G_control lip_1), etc.), the replay is performed. Operates. Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to “MB (middle bonus)” (the combination of symbols of the display combination (G_MB) related to the code name “MB01” in FIG. 22) is determined as the display combination. MB (CB) is activated.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table is stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 59 described later) provided in the main RAM 53, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning number counter when a bonus operation is performed. Specify the data to be processed.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game that is in operation. In this embodiment, a middle bonus (hereinafter referred to as “MB”) and a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) are provided as bonus game types. “CB” is a so-called second type special object. “MB” is called an accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory, and “CB” is operated continuously. Therefore, when “MB” is activated, “CB” is also activated.

  The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a specified number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display combination associated with the code name “MB01” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 22 is stopped and displayed on the active line, “MB” is activated, and then the prescribed number If a medal exceeding “14” is paid out, “MB” ends.

  In the operation of “MB” described above, first, at the time of starting the bonus, a numerical value (specified number) defined in the bonus operation time table is stored in the bonus end number counter. Next, every time a medal is paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. When the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than “0”, the active bonus is ended.

  The game possible number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can be played at the time of “CB” operation, so-called possible number of games. The winable number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can display a combination of symbols related to winning at the time of operating “MB (CB)”, so-called winable number. However, it is not defined in this embodiment.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, five types of RT0 gaming states to RT4 gaming states are provided as RT gaming states, which are different in internal winning combination of replay and their winning probabilities. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the transition condition between the RT gaming states is that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Specifically, regardless of the RT gaming state of the transfer source, the code names “BP01” (G_push order failure 1 player combination 1), “BP02” (G_press order failure 1 player role 2) and “R001” (G_RT0 When the symbol combination of the display combination related to any of (transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, regardless of the RT game state of the transfer source, the symbol combination of the display combination related to either the code name “KB01” (G_RT1 transfer) or “R101” (G_RT1 transfer lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line. In this case, the RT gaming state transitions to the RT1 gaming state.

  When the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name “R201” (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the RT game state of the transition source, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Migrate to Regardless of the RT game state of the transfer source, the symbol combination of the display combination relating to any of the code names “R301” (G_RT3 transfer lip_1) to “R311” (G_RT3 transfer lip_11) is stopped and displayed on the active line. If it is, the RT gaming state transitions to the RT3 gaming state. Furthermore, when the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name “R401” (G_RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the RT gaming state of the transition source, the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state. Migrate to

  The characteristics of each RT gaming state and the transition flow between RT gaming states will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, an internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between each game state and the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lotteries set in each game state.

  Specifically, in the general gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the general gaming state internal lottery table is used, and “50” is set as the number of lotteries. In the CB gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the CB internal lottery table is used, and “35” is set as the number of lotteries.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning number and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each of the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) and the CB gaming state.

  In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles set in advance. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process according to the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random value) extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) is determined according to each winning number. Subtract sequentially. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative (a “digit” occurs) at a predetermined winning number, the winning number is won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the number specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that assigned data (a data pointer described later) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

(1) General gaming state internal lottery table (RT0)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0). This internal gaming state internal lottery table is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "50" and the lottery value.

  For example, in RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), referring to setting 6 in the internal lottery table for general gaming state, the probability that the winning number “2” (abbreviation “F_RT0 lip”) is won is “8978/65536 It is. When the winning number “2” is won, “2” is acquired as a data pointer to be described later.

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0), as shown in FIG. 33, a predetermined lottery value (5467) is defined for each of the winning numbers “38” to “40”. When any of the winning numbers “38” to “40” wins, an internal winning combination relating to any of the abbreviations “F_middle bell 1” to “F_right middle left bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination. .

  These internal winning combinations include a transition combination (code name “KB01” (G_RT1 transition)) that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, as shown in an internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later. . Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “38” to “40” is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Sometimes.

(2) RT1 internal lottery table FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT1 internal lottery table. The RT1 internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT1 internal lottery table, the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “35” and the lottery value is defined.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) are not changed and the same lottery value is used.

  In the RT1 internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 34, predetermined lottery values are defined for the winning numbers “3” to “9”. When any of the winning numbers “3” to “9” wins, an internal winning combination relating to any one of the abbreviations “F_RT2 shift-213” to “F_3 continuous donlip” is determined as an internal winning combination.

  As shown in an internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, these internal winning combinations include various transition combinations (code name “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), code name “R201” ( G_RT2 transition lip) and code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition lip)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “3” to “9” is determined by internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state according to the winning type. May transition to any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state.

(3) RT2 internal lottery table FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT2 internal lottery table. The RT2 internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT2 internal lottery table, the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “35” and the lottery value is defined.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) are not changed and the same lottery value is used.

  In the RT2 internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 35, predetermined lottery values are defined for the winning numbers “10” to “16”. When any of the winning numbers “10” to “16” wins, an internal winning combination relating to any of the abbreviations “F_middle don 0 transition 2nd” to “F_RB fake” is determined as an internal winning combination.

  For these internal winning combinations, as shown in an internal winning combination determination table in FIG. 39 described later, various transition combinations of the RT gaming state (code name “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), code name “R101” (G_RT1 transition) ), Code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition lip), and code names “R401” (G_RT4 transition lip)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “10” to “16” is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state according to the winning type. May transition to any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

(4) RT3 internal lottery table FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT3 internal lottery table. The RT3 internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT3 internal lottery table, the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “35” and the lottery value is defined.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) are not changed and the same lottery value is used.

  In the RT3 internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, predetermined lottery values are defined for the winning numbers “1”, “17” to “23”, “30”, and “31”. When any of the winning numbers “1”, “17” to “23”, “30” and “31” is won, the abbreviations “F_Normal Lip”, “F_Don Lower Fake” to “F_” are given as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination relating to any of “Don middle stage alignment”, “F_RT4 transition 2nd” and “F_RT4 transition 3rd” is determined.

  As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, these internal winning combinations include various transition combinations of the RT gaming state (code name “R101” (G_RT1 transition lip), code name “R401” (G_RT4 transition) Lip)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “1”, “17” to “23”, “30” and “31” is determined by the internal lottery, the winning Depending on the type, the RT gaming state may transition from the RT3 gaming state to either the RT1 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

(5) RT4 internal lottery table FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RT4 internal lottery table. The RT4 internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT4 internal lottery table, the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “35” and the lottery value is defined.

  When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the fields of the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0) are not changed and the same lottery value is used.

  In the RT4 internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, predetermined lotteries are assigned to the winning numbers “1”, “8”, “9”, “24” to “29”, and “32” to “35”, respectively. Value is specified. When any of the winning numbers “8”, “9”, “24” to “29” and “32” to “35” wins, the abbreviations “F_normal lip”, “F_3 consecutive don lip” , “F_3 consecutive middle lip”, “F_reach eye lip 1” to “F_reach eye lip 6” and “F_RT4-2 transition 213” to “F_RT4-2 transition 321” It is determined.

  For these internal winning combinations, as shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 39 described later, various transition combinations of the RT gaming state (code name “R101” (G_RT1 transition lip), code name “R201” (G_RT2 transition) ) And code names “R301” to “R311” (G_RT3 transition lip)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “8”, “9”, “24” to “29” and “32” to “35” is determined by internal lottery. Depending on the winning type, the RT gaming state may change from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state.

  As described above, in the internal lottery table for RT1 to the internal lottery table for RT4, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” are the internal lottery tables for the general gaming state shown in FIG. The same lottery value as the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “35” of RT0) is used. That is, also in the RT1 internal lottery table to the RT4 internal lottery table, predetermined lottery values are defined for the winning numbers “38” to “40”, respectively. When any of the winning numbers “38” to “40” wins, an internal winning combination relating to any of the abbreviations “F_middle bell 1” to “F_right middle left bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination. .

  These internal winning combinations include transitional combinations (code names “BP01” and “BP02” (1 push order failure)) that shift the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is one of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state and any of the winning numbers “38” to “40” is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. May be transferred to.

(6) CB internal lottery table FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration of the CB internal lottery table. The CB internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the CB gaming state (MB gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the CB gaming state, the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “35” and the lottery value is defined.

  For example, in the CB gaming state (MB gaming state), referring to the CB internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number “2” (abbreviation “F_RT0 lip”) is won is “8978/65536”. In the present embodiment, in the CB (MB) gaming state, in addition to the combination (replay combination) defined in the CB internal lottery table, all small combinations (CB combination) are won (see FIG. 40 described later). (Refer to Part 2).

  FIG. 38 shows an internal lottery table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 state (initial state or the like) and the CB (MB) has won a prize (the MB is activated). . However, although not shown here, the internal lottery table for CB that is referred to when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT0 state and the CB (MB) has won a prize (the MB has been activated). Is also prepared separately.

  Further, as is apparent from the various internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, in this embodiment, “out of” occurs in the internal lottery process. Although not shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, a winning number “0” is assigned to “out”.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the internal winning combination determination table will be described. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the data pointer is determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The data pointer is data acquired based on the winning number acquired as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is used for designating the internal winning combination specified by the internal winning combination determination table. It is data.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), an internal lottery table (general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0), RT1 internal lottery table to RT4) in the general gaming state. The winning number defined in the internal lottery table) is the value of the data pointer. Therefore, it corresponds to the winning numbers “1” to “35” defined in the internal lottery table in the general gaming state (general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0), RT1 internal lottery table to RT4 internal lottery table). The values of the data pointers to be set are “1” to “35”, respectively. The value of the data pointer corresponding to “out” is also the same value as the winning number “0”.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a bonus state (MB gaming state), a value obtained by adding “51” to the value of the winning number defined in the CB internal lottery table becomes the value of the data pointer. Therefore, the values of the data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “35” defined in the CB internal lottery table are “52” to “86”, respectively. Also, the value of the data pointer corresponding to “out” is also set to “51” by adding “51” to the winning number “0”.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, not only the code name and abbreviation indicating the internal winning combination but also the display along the effective line is permitted in the “internal winning combination” column in the internal winning combination determining table. Data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is defined. Specifically, the identification data of “internal winning combination” is represented by a combination of 1-byte data and a storage area, similarly to “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

  In the internal winning combination determination table, “◯” indicates an internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer. When the data pointer is “0”, the content of “internal winning combination” is “out of”, which is a combination of all symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

  In the internal winning combination determination table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 39, the correspondence between the data pointers “1” to “50” and the internal winning combination is defined. That is, when determining the internal winning combination based on the acquired data pointer in the non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), the internal winning combination determining table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 39 is referred to.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT0 gaming state, for example, when the data pointer “2” (corresponding to the winning number “2” in the internal lottery table of FIG. 33) is acquired, as shown in FIG. As the winning combination, the internal winning combination (replay combination) relating to the code names “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), “RT01” (G_upper lip), “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” (G_middle lip) Will win.

  In the internal winning combination determination table (part 2) shown in FIG. 40, the correspondence between the data pointers “51” to “86” and the internal winning combination is defined. That is, in determining the internal winning combination based on the acquired data pointer in the bonus state (MB gaming state), the internal winning combination determining table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 40 is referred to.

  In this embodiment, in the bonus state (MB gaming state), for example, when the data pointer “53” (corresponding to the winning number “2” in the CB internal lottery table in FIG. 38) is acquired, As shown in FIG. 40, code names “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), “RT01” (G_upper lip), “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” (G_middle lip) are used as internal winning combinations. Such internal winning combination (replay combination) and internal winning combinations related to all small combinations (code name “BP01” (G_1 push order failure 1 sheet) to “KC07” (G_horn cherry 7)) are duplicated.

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in a reel stop initial setting process (described later with reference to FIG. 259).

  The spinning cylinder stop number selection table of this embodiment defines a different spinning cylinder stop number for each data pointer. Specifically, the rotation stop numbers “0” to “86” are associated with the data pointers “0” to “86”, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the data pointer is “3”, the rotation stop number “3” is selected.

  Note that the spinning stop number selection table of this embodiment defines a different spinning stop number for each data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the turn-stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same turn-stop number may be defined for different data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push The correspondence relationship between the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is defined, a pull-in priority table defined in a pull-in priority table (see FIG. 48) described later. Data relating to the priority order of the display combination corresponding to the number can be acquired.

  In addition, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a drawing priority table number corresponding to the number for turning stop is not defined, a drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 47 to be described later) is referred to for drawing in. The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the priority table selection table number is determined.

  The forward selection table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push table change initial data specify a stop table (see FIGS. 43 to 45 described later) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data for. In this specification, the “forward push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the pressing order of “middle left” and “middle left”.

  The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 46 described later) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In this specification, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R. It corresponds to the order of pressing “middle right” and “middle right”.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state), after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. Then, the symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as “stop start position”.

  That is, the number of sliding pieces is the rotation amount of the predetermined reel from when the stop operation for the predetermined reel is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the predetermined reel of the display window in the period from when the stop operation to the predetermined reel is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel stops. . This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

  Referring to a stop table described later, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is temporary, and the planned stop position of the reel is not immediately determined by the acquired number of sliding pieces.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces from the number of sliding pieces (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) acquired based on a stop table described later (see FIG. 43 described later). Then, the number of sliding frames is changed with reference to a pull-in priority table (see FIG. 48 described later). The sliding piece number determination data is used to determine the search order when the priorities are compared for each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position that is four or one symbol ahead of the maximum number of sliding symbols. Used.

  In the present embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the pressing order of stop buttons for forward pressing and irregular pressing. Specifically, in the case of a forward push, a first stop stop table (described later with reference to FIG. 43) and a second and third stop table (described later with reference to FIG. Reference). On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, a later-described irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 46 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the stop table for first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 43 is a stop table that is referred to when the table selection data for forward pressing is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the number-of-sliding piece determination data is “0”, and the change status is “1”. The change status is used when referring to a forward push control change table (see FIG. 44 described later).

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the forward change control change table will be described. The forward pressing control change table shown in FIG. 44 is a change table that is referred to when the forward pressing table change data is “00”. The forward pressing control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing.

  For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table (see FIG. 43) at the time of the forward press is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops is “12” at the time of forward pressing. In the forward push control change table, if the change status and the second and third stop stop table numbers for forward push are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  45 is referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for stoppage are “08”. The irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority table selection table number and stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in a pull-in priority table (see FIG. 48 described later).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the column of “first stop for left turn” in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority table selection table number is “01”, the drawing priority table number “01” is acquired first. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47, the pull-in priority table number “01” is maintained thereafter regardless of the reel types to be stopped second and third.

  Also, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the target position column in the table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is Acquired as the pull-in priority table number. For example, when the middle reel 3C is first stopped and the drawing priority table selection table number is “00”, the drawing priority table number is not registered in the column of the target position corresponding to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the right-hand column of the right reel first stop column corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection table number “00” is referred to, and “02” is acquired as the pull-in priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “09”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is represented by 1-byte data, like the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 22 to 29, and a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-described first stop table for first stop (see FIG. 43). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, in the drawing priority table, the stop display (pulling in) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is displayed in the combination display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. Prioritized over stop display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, not only the priority order of the internal winning combination differs depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions. For example, when the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the priority section number is 3, and when the pull-in priority table number is “09”, the priority section number is 2. .

  Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “00” will be described, and description of priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the priority order “1” includes code names “Z001” to “Z036”, “R301” to “R311”, “R401”, “R201”, and “R101”. , “R001”, “RT01”, “RB01” and “RC01” are defined.

  When the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the priority order “2” includes code names “KB01”, “BP01”, “BP02”, “BF01” to “BF03”, “BL01” to “BL03”. , “BM01”, “BC01”, “SG01”, “WT01”, “WB01”, “WU01”, “WD01”, “WC01”, “CC01”, and “KC01” to “KC07”. It is prescribed. In the priority order “3” when the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the pull-in data corresponding to the code name “MB01” is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter referred to as “search order”). )). The search order table shown in FIG. 49 is a table that is referred to when stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding frames being four. The search order table shown in FIG. 50 is a table that is referred to when stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding symbols as one (when the number of sliding symbols is determined for at least one reel during MB operation).

  The search order table defines the number of sliding piece determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order. Further, in the present embodiment, during the MB (CB) operation, stop control is performed with a maximum number of four sliding pieces for reels other than the reel having the maximum number of sliding pieces of one.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 269 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lowest search order “5” (or “2”) in the search order table, The number corresponding to the search order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding frames.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the active line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29).

  For example, when the symbol “DON” is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 62 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (DON) in the reel type “left”. “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area described later (see FIG. 62 described later).

[Game lock lottery table]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific internal winning combination is won in the RT0 to RT4 game states, a lottery of game locks is performed. When the lottery is won, a predetermined reel effect (game lock) is performed during the reel acceleration process. Note that while the game lock is occurring, even if a closing operation or a stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed. The various game lock lottery tables described herein are mainly used when determining various game lock patterns to be performed during the reel acceleration process.

  Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, a game lock lottery table is provided for each RT gaming state. The game lock lottery table defines lottery values of game lock types (lock numbers) to be won according to a winning number (data pointer) determined by internal lottery in a predetermined RT gaming state (RT0 to RT4 gaming state). .

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 1) referred to in the RT0 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (part 1) includes winning numbers “43” (abbreviated as “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviated as “F_strongest ice”) and “46” (abbreviated as “F_strong ice”) to “49”. ”(Abbreviation“ F_chance role ”), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), “47” (abbreviation “F_middle stage cho”) and “48” (abbreviation “ In the case of any one of “F_confirmation check”), one of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotating effect pattern 2) is selected. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, when the winning number is one of “46” (abbreviation “F_strong check”) and “49” (abbreviation “F_chance feature”), the lock number 0 (normal pattern) and One game lock of the lock number 1 (rotation effect pattern 1) is selected.

  Note that the lock number 0 (normal pattern) corresponds to a pattern in which the reel is not locked (normal reel acceleration processing). Further, lock number 1 (rotation effect pattern 1) and lock number 2 (rotation effect pattern 2) correspond to a lock effect pattern called “short lock”.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 2) referred to in the RT1 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (No. 2) has a winning number “9” (abbreviation “F_3 consecutive middle lip”), “24” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 1”), “25” (abbreviation “F_reach eye”). Lip 2 ”),“ 43 ”(abbreviation“ F_strong ice ”),“ 44 ”(abbreviation“ F_strongest ice ”) and“ 46 ”(abbreviation“ F_strong Choi ”) to“ 49 ”(abbreviation“ F_chance eye ”) In each of the “combination”), a lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), “47” (abbreviation “F_middle stage cho”) and “48” (abbreviation “ In the case of any one of F_confirmation check)), a game lock of any one of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. . In the RT1 gaming state, the winning number is “24” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 1”), “25” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 2”), “46” (abbreviation “F_strong check”). ) And “49” (abbreviated name “F_chance role”), one of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotational effect pattern 1) is selected. . Further, in the RT1 gaming state, when the winning number is “9” (abbreviated “F_3 consecutive use donlip”), one of the lock number 0 (normal pattern) and the lock number 3 (rotor effect pattern 3) is selected. Is done.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 3) referred to in the RT2 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (part 3) includes winning numbers “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), and “46” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”) to “49”. ”(Abbreviation“ F_chance role ”), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT2 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), “47” (abbreviation “F_middle stage cho”), and “48” (abbreviation “ In the case of any one of F_confirmation check)), a game lock of any one of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. . Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviation “F_strong Choi”) or “49” (abbreviation “F_chance hero”), it is the same as in the RT0 gaming state. One of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotation effect pattern 1) is selected.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 4) referred to in the RT3 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (part 4) includes winning numbers “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”) and “46” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”) to “49”. ”(Abbreviation“ F_chance role ”), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is defined.

  In the RT3 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), “47” (abbreviation “F_middle stage cho”) and “48” (abbreviation “ In the case of any one of F_confirmation check)), a game lock of any one of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. . Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviation “F_Strong Cho”) or “49” (abbreviation “F_Chance Opportunity”), as in the RT0 gaming state. One of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotation effect pattern 1) is selected.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (part 5) referred to in the RT4 gaming state. The game lock lottery table (No. 5) includes winning numbers “1” (abbreviation “F_normal lip”), “24” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 1”), “25” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip”). 2)), “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”) and “46” (abbreviation “F_strong Choi”) to “49” (abbreviation “F_chance”) )), The lottery values of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) are defined.

  In the RT4 gaming state, the winning numbers are “43” (abbreviation “F_strong ice”), “44” (abbreviation “F_strongest ice”), “47” (abbreviation “F_middle stage cho”) and “48” (abbreviation “ In the case of any one of F_confirmation check)), a game lock of any one of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. . Further, in the RT4 gaming state, when the winning number is either “46” (abbreviation “F_Strong Cho”) or “49” (abbreviation “F_Chance Opportunity”), the lock number 0 (normal pattern) One of the game locks having the lock number 1 (rotating drum effect pattern 1) is selected.

  In the RT4 gaming state, if the winning number is either “24” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 1”) or “25” (abbreviation “F_reach eye lip 2”), the lock A game lock of number 0 (normal pattern) is selected. Further, in the RT4 game state, when the winning number is “1” (abbreviation “F_normal lip”), the lock number 0 (normal pattern), the lock number 4 (transition to the next game carnival at the first stop in the middle) and One of the lock numbers 5 (the next game carnival shift at the first stop on the right) is selected.

  The game lock lottery table (No. 5) is not limited to the game lock lottery table in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) described later, and the sub gaming state is directly described later without going through the XR (extreme rush) mode game described later. It also serves as a lottery table for determining whether or not to shift to the XRC (XR Carnival) mode game. Then, in the RT4 gaming state, when the game lock lottery table (No. 5) is used to win the lock number 4, the sub-gaming state will be described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the middle reel 3C. Transition to XRC mode is confirmed. Further, in the RT4 gaming state, when the game lock lottery table (No. 5) is used and the lock number 5 is won, the sub gaming state will be described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the right reel 3R. Transition to XRC mode is confirmed.

[Lottery table during continuous lock]
In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state (art state described later), when a game described later in XRC mode is being performed, a plurality of game locks (continuous lock) are executed during one reel acceleration period. Is done. The lottery table in the continuous lock state described here is used when determining the pattern of the continuous lock (the number of locks, the lock timer, etc.) performed during the reel acceleration process.

  With reference to FIG. 57, the lottery table in the continuous lock state will be described. This lottery table is referred to in a continuous game lock lottery process during a game lock lottery process described later (see FIG. 258 described later).

  The lottery table in the continuous lock state defines the correspondence between the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) and the lottery value. In addition, when the value of the effect state mentioned later is less than 5, the lottery value in the lottery table in the continuous lock state is doubled.

  The remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) is data related to the time set in the lock timer. Although not shown here, when the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) increases, the time set in the lock timer Is set to be longer. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the remaining number of lotteries (continuous lock number) is increased (when the time set in the lock timer is increased), the number of additional games in the XRC mode is set to be increased (described later). 158 of XR carnival addition addition table 1 of FIG. 158).

  The “lock count” in the XR carnival addition table 1 in FIG. 158 described later is a value obtained by dividing the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) by 2 and rounding off the decimal part of the result of the division. Therefore, for example, the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) “19” corresponds to the lock count “9”.

  In the continuous game lock lottery process using the lottery table in the continuous lock state of the present embodiment, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65536) is used for each remaining lottery count. The lottery value specified corresponding to (continuous lock number) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of subtraction becomes negative ("digit" occurs) at a predetermined remaining number of lotteries (continuous lock number), it means that the remaining lottery number (continuous lock number) is won.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 53 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for the various reel effects (various game locks) described above.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 62 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 62, when a predetermined bit is set to “1” (stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning and the symbol combination that triggers the transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 62, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “out of place”.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). The carryover combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the storage area 2 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, when any of “C_MB1” to “C_MB4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, “REP1”-“REP1”-“BEL1” of “C_MB1”) is displayed on the active line. Is done. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Indicates. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the MB is operating and the gaming state is the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 51 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each active line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped, and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 63). The After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 63.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 51), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided. In this case, the active line may be changed according to the number of BETs or the game state.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority level pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority level data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority level table number in the pull-in priority level table (see FIG. 48) referred to when determining the pull-in priority level data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 49 or FIG. 50).

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described.

  FIG. 64 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during non-bonus (non-MB) and the stop order, and corresponds to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stop order of the reels. Indicates the type of display combination to be performed. In FIG. 64, for the sake of simplicity, only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination for the game is different depending on the pressing order is shown.

  For example, when the data pointer is “2”, the code names “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip), “RT01” (G_upper lip), “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” are used as internal winning combinations. ”(G_middle stage lip), the internal winning combination is won (see FIG. 39). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “left middle right” (stop order “123” in FIG. 64) or “left and right middle” (stop order “132” in FIG. 64), the code name “RT01” (G_ The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to “upper lip”, “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line. On the other hand, the reels are “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 64), “middle right and left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 64), “right left and middle” (stop order “312” in FIG. 64). ) Or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 64), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line. The

  In the present embodiment, in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 64, when the data pointer is any one of “17” to “22” and “24” to “29”, and the pressing order of the stop buttons is forward pressing, When the stop button is pressed at a timing at which the internal winning combination (replay combination) described in the corresponding table (the column in which (*) in FIG. 64 is described) cannot be stopped, another replay combination is displayed. Is configured to stop.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the data pointer is “9” (when an XBB mode immediate-release pseudo bonus described later is won) and the right reel 3R is first stopped, as shown in FIG. Among the code names “R301” to “R311”, the symbol combination of the display combination other than the display combination related to the code name “R304” (G_RT3 transition lip_4) is preferentially controlled on the effective line. That is, when the data pointer is “9” and the pressing order is “312” or “321”, a symbol combination (symbol “DON” − “DON” − “DON” related to a pseudo bonus in the XBB mode described later) ": Middle dong alignment") is configured so that the stop is not substantially displayed.

  FIG. 65 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) in the MB and the stop order of the reels, and the display corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type (code name) of the combination.

  For example, when the data pointer is “51”, all the small combinations are won as internal winning combinations (see FIG. 40). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle left and right” (stop order “213”), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “BM01” (G_14 bells) is stopped and displayed on the active line. A medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the reels are stopped in an order other than “middle left and right”, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “BL02” (G_15 bells_2) or “BL03” (G_15 bells_3) stops on the active line. Displayed and 15 medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the MB ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14 (see FIG. 30). Therefore, for example, when the data pointer “51” is acquired in the MB, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle left and right” in the first game, and the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “BM01” is determined. By stopping and displaying on the active line, two unit games can be consumed in the MB, and a maximum of 29 medals can be paid out (the net increase in medals is 23). That is, for example, when the data pointer “51” is acquired in the MB, such a large medal payout can be obtained by stopping the reels in the order of “middle left and right” (stop order “213”). it can.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the MB, the condition that the symbol combination “BL01” (G_15 bells_ 1) for the internal winning combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line is that the data pointer is “58”. Only when the reel stop order is “left middle right” (stop order “123”). In other words, the internal winning combination relating to the code name “BL01” (G_15 bells_1) is provided as a so-called “rare combination”, thereby suppressing the game in the MB from becoming monotonous.

  Note that the “rare role” in the present embodiment refers to a winning number “8”, “9”, “24”, “25”, “36”, “37”, “42” to “42” in non-MB games. “49” and the internal winning combination of the winning number “0 (out)” in the RT2 to RT4 gaming state. In the game in the MB, the internal winning combination of the winning numbers “7”, “26” and “27” is referred to as “rare combination”.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the reel stop order, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 66 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination (data pointer), the reel stop order, and the RT transition, and the RT game state transition destination corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates.

  For example, when the data pointer is “2” (abbreviation “F_RT0 lip”), as described in FIG. 64, when the reels are stopped in the order of “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, the code name The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to “RT01” (G_upper lip), “RB01” (G_lower lip) and “RC01” (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line. Since these display combinations are not transition combinations for the RT gaming state, the RT gaming state does not transition in this case.

  On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in the order other than “left middle right” and “left and right middle”, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R001” (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line. Since this display combination is a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 31), in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

  For example, when the data pointer is “12” (abbreviation “F_Don-4 transition 2nd”) or “13” (abbreviation “F_Don-4 transition 3rd”), the reel is set to “left middle right” or When stopping in the order of “middle left and right”, among the code names “R301” to “R303” and “R305” to “R306”, internal winnings other than the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R302” (G_RT3 transition lip_2) The symbol combination of the winning combination (internal winning combination relating to the BB mode of a pseudo bonus described later) is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. At this time, the sub gaming state shifts to a BB (don / red 7) mode of a pseudo bonus described later.

  On the other hand, when the data pointer is “14” (abbreviation “F_RB-4 transition 2nd”) or “15” (abbreviation “F_RB-4 transition 3rd”), the reel is set to “left middle right” or “left and right”. When stopped in the order of “medium”, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R302” (G_RT3 transition lip_2) is stopped and displayed on the active line with priority, and the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (individual operation). (Pseudo bonus). At this time, the sub gaming state shifts to a pseudo bonus RB mode described later.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, the symbol combination of the transition combination differs depending on the mode type in the transition destination pseudo bonus. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game shifts to a game with a different pseudo bonus due to the difference in the symbol combination displayed at the time of transition to the RT3 gaming state.

  Note that “reset”, “maintain”, and “one-step UP” in parentheses after “no transition” described in the data pointers “32” to “35” in the correspondence table of FIG. 66 will be described later. The transition of the lock state is shown.

  In addition, “Move to RT3” is described in the stop order “312” and “321” columns of the data pointers “17” to “19” and “23” in the correspondence table of FIG. 66. Since the data pointer is a data pointer acquired only in the RT3 gaming state, it is substantially “no transition”. In other data pointers, depending on the timing of pressing the stop button, a transition combination (replay combination) that triggers the transition to the RT game state that is currently staying may be displayed. In this case, In the correspondence table of FIG. 66, “no transition” is described.

<Game flow>
Next, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, a lottery operation in various RT gaming states and a transition operation between RT gaming states controlled by the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 51, and FIG. 68 is a table summarizing the activation condition and termination condition of each RT gaming state.

  67 and 68 correspond to the code names defined in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 22 to 29, for example. Further, FIG. 67 also shows various game states (hereinafter referred to as sub game states) related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81).

[Various RT game states]
In the present embodiment, as described above, as the RT gaming state, five types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability are different from each other are provided.

(1) RT0 gaming state The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set in the initial state, and is a gaming state with a low replay winning probability.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, specifically, the replay role (hereinafter referred to as the RT0 transition replay) related to the code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip) shown in FIGS. Lottery). In the RT0 gaming state, when the stop button is pressed by irregular pressing while the RT0 replay is internally won, the symbol combination related to the RT0 replay is stopped and displayed on the active line (winning).

  Further, in the RT0 gaming state, an internal winning combination related to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition) shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 may win. In addition, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (the transition to RT1) is when the small combination relating to “Bell” whose number of medals is paid out cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line. It is a symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and becomes a trigger for transition to the RT1 gaming state (transition role).

(2) RT1 gaming state The RT1 gaming state is an RT gaming state that is set when the sub gaming state is a normal state, which will be described later, and is a gaming state that has a low replay winning probability.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT1 gaming state, specifically, the replay role corresponding to the code name “R101” (RT1 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 (hereinafter referred to as RT1 transition) Lottery). At this time, the RT1 transition replay with 4 selections in the push order is lottery.

  Further, in the RT1 gaming state, when the RT1 transition replay in the push order of 4 choices is internally won, the RT0 transition replay and the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT2 gaming state, specifically, FIG. 67 and FIG. Are set so that the replay combination (hereinafter referred to as RT2 transition replay) corresponding to the code name “R201” (RT2 transition replay) described in FIG. Then, when an irregular pressing is performed in a state where the RT1 transition replay, the RT0 transition replay, and the RT2 transition replay with four selections are overlapped, there is a possibility that the RT0 transition replay or the RT2 transition replay wins.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT3 gaming state, specifically, the replay corresponding to the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 67 and 68. In some cases, a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as RT3 transition replay) is won alone (separately from RT1 transition replay). In the RT1 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

  Furthermore, in the RT1 gaming state, an internal winning combination related to the code names “BP01” and “BP02” (one push order failure) shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 may win. These combinations are small combinations in which one medal is paid out when the pressing order is missed due to irregular pressing, and winning of this small combination becomes an opportunity (transition combination) to enter the RT0 gaming state.

(3) RT2 gaming state The RT2 gaming state is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is a state referred to as “between flags”, and is a gaming state with a high replay winning probability.

  The RT2 gaming state is the RT3 transition replay and the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT4 gaming state. Specifically, the replay role corresponding to the code name “R401” (RT4 transition lip) described in FIGS. 67 and 68 (Hereinafter referred to as RT4 transition replay) is an RT gaming state in which a winning (establishment) is made with a high probability. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, the RT0 transition replay is set to overlap when the RT3 transition replay and the RT4 transition replay are internally won. In this case, when the stop button pressing order is other than the predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is incorrect), the RT0 transition replay is won.

  Also, in the RT2 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the code names “BP01” and “BP02” (one push order failure), which is a small role that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the RT1 gaming state There is a case where an internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition) serving as a transition opportunity (transitional combination) wins.

(4) RT3 gaming state The RT3 gaming state (first replay time state) is an RT gaming state set when the sub gaming state is a pseudo bonus described later, and is a gaming state with a high replay winning probability. .

  The RT3 gaming state is an RT gaming state in which the RT4 transition replay wins (establishes) with a high probability when the stop button is pressed in a predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is correct). In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay overlaps when the RT4 transition replay is internally won. In this case, if the stop button is pressed incorrectly, RT1 transition replay wins.

  Also, in the RT3 gaming state, the internal winning combination (small role) related to the code names “BP01” and “BP02” (one push order failure) that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the transition to the RT1 gaming state An internal winning combination related to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition) as a trigger may be awarded.

(5) RT4 gaming state The RT4 gaming state (second replay time state) is an RT gaming state that is set when the sub gaming state is an ART state described later, and is a gaming state that has a high replay winning probability. .

  The RT4 gaming state includes the RT1 transition replay (particularly, the replay role of the winning number “1” (abbreviated as “F_normal lip”)) and the RT2 transition replay (particularly, the winning number “32” (abbreviated as “F_RT4-2 transition 213”). ) To “33” (any replay combination of “F_RT4-2 transition 321”) is an RT gaming state that is established (wins) with a high probability.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay overlaps when the RT2 transition replay is internally won. In this case, if the stop button is pressed incorrectly, RT1 transition replay wins.

  In RT4 gaming state, RT3 transition replay, specifically, a replay combination corresponding to the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip) described in FIGS. 67 and 68 may be won alone. is there. In the RT4 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

  Also, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the code names “BP01” and “BP02” (one push order failure) that is a trigger for the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the transition to the RT1 gaming state The internal winning combination related to the code name “KB01” (abbreviation “G_RT1 transition”) as a trigger may win.

[RT game state transition flow]
Next, the transition flow between the various RT gaming states described above will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the fact that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line indicates that the transition condition between RT gaming states (the activation of each RT gaming state) Condition and end condition). The transition operation between RT gaming states is controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) referring to an RT transition table (see FIG. 31) described later.

  First, when the pachislot 1 is in an initial state (for example, at the time of shipment), or in any of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, the code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “BP01” or “BP02” (push order) When the internal winning combination related to (one failure) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 68, the RT0 gaming state end condition is a stop display of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the RT gaming state is changed from the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. Transition to the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the end condition of the RT1 gaming state is as follows: code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “R201” (RT2 transition lip), “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip), “BP01” ”And“ BP02 ”(one push order failure), the internal winning combination stop display.

  Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “BP01” or “BP02” (one push order failure) is stopped on the active line (winning) 67), the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. In the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R201” (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state is changed from the RT1 gaming state to RT2. Transition to gaming state. Furthermore, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to any of the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state Shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the end condition of the RT2 gaming state includes code names “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip), “R401” (RT4 transition lip), “KB01”. ”(RT1 transition),“ BP01 ”, and“ BP02 ”(pressing order failure 1 sheet), the internal winning combination is stopped.

  Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “BP01” or “BP02” (one push order failure) is stopped on the active line (winning) 67), the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. Also, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to any of the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state Shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  Also, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R401” (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), as shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state Shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Furthermore, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “KB01” (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the RT gaming state transitions from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the end condition of the RT3 gaming state is as follows: code name “R101” (RT1 transfer lip), “R401” (RT4 transfer lip), “KB01” (RT1 transfer lip), “BP01” and “BP02” ”(Stop pressing one piece) is a stop display of the internal winning combination.

  Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R101” (RT1 transition lip) or “KB01” (RT1 transition point) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning) As shown in FIG. 67, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R401” (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4. Transition to gaming state. Furthermore, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “BP01” or “BP02” (one push order failure) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the RT gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Transition to the state.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the end condition of the RT4 gaming state is as follows: code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “R101” (RT1 transition lip), “R201” (RT2 transition lip), “R301” to “R311” ”(RT3 transition lip),“ KB01 ”(RT1 transition),“ BP01 ”and“ BP02 ”(one push order failure), a stop display of the internal winning combination.

  Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R001” (RT0 transition lip), “BP01” or “BP02” (one push order failure) is stopped on the active line (winning) 67), the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. Also, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R101” (RT1 transition lip) or “KB01” (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), As shown at 67, the RT gaming state transitions from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R201” (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state is changed from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 Transition to gaming state. In the RT4 gaming state, when the internal winning combination relating to any of the code names “R301” to “R311” (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the active line (when winning), the RT gaming state Shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

<Various sub game states>
Next, various sub game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) will be described. In the present embodiment, as the sub game state, various sub game states called “normal state”, “pseudo bonus”, “ART state”, and “BGZ (billy get zone)” are mainly provided. Although not described here, as will be described in the flow of various control processes performed by the sub CPU 81 described later, the sub game state includes “ART ready state”, “confirmed screen state”, “pseudo bonus end standby state” Is also provided.

[Normal state]
The normal state is a sub gaming state that is executed when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state and is a non-ART gaming state.

  In the normal state, a lottery is performed for each game and a pseudo bonus, and when a rare combination wins, the sub gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus. In the normal state, when the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 1280 games), the winning of the pseudo bonus (“XBB mode” in the present embodiment) is determined. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the transition flow of the RT gaming state in FIG. 67, the transition from the RT0 or RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state is not made directly due to the transition trigger of the display combination or the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub gaming state does not directly shift from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub gaming state may directly shift from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery (according to a transition trigger such as a display combination).

  In this embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches a specific number of ceiling games (the number of XR ceiling games described later), the winning of the XR mode (ART state) is determined. The sub gaming state directly shifts from the normal state to the ART state.

  Further, in the normal state, a lottery for shifting to each game and BGZ is performed, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state is shifted to BGZ. In the present embodiment, the expected transition to BGZ changes according to the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the pseudo bonus.

  For example, when the number of digested games is 1 to 100, “medium expectation”, when the number of digested games is 181 to 210 or 281 to 310, “expectation is low”, and the number of digested games is 481 to 510. In some cases, the expected degree of transition to BGZ changes with a pattern such as “low expectation” and “100% winning” when the number of digested games is 900. The relationship between the number of digested games and the expected level of transition to BGZ is based on various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179 described later). It is prescribed.

  This BGZ lottery table is set after the end of the previous pseudo bonus, and is maintained until the end of the next pseudo bonus. Therefore, during that time, regardless of whether the sub gaming state is the normal state or the ART state, the BGZ lottery table set after the end of the previous pseudo bonus is maintained.

[ART state]
The ART state (special gaming state) is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT4 gaming state. In this embodiment, an ART game of 50 games is performed.

  In the ART state, as in the normal state, lottery for each game and pseudo bonus is performed, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus. Even in the ART state, when the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games, the winning of the pseudo bonus is determined.

  Further, in the ART state, as in the normal state, a lottery for shifting to each game and BGZ is performed, and if the lottery is won, the sub gaming state is shifted to BGZ. Note that the expected degree of transition to BGZ at this time changes according to the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus, as in the normal state.

  Furthermore, in the ART state, a plurality of types of game modes that provide a more advantageous game state for the player are provided. Specifically, game modes called “XR (extreme rush) mode”, “XRC (XR carnival) mode” and “rocket mode” are provided.

  In this embodiment, in a game in an ART state other than the above-described various game modes, when the correct answer (an alternative effect) called “BG (Billy Get) Challenge” is correct (when the BG challenge is successful) ), The sub gaming state shifts to the XR mode. In addition, in the BG challenge, a player can perform an alternative selection operation effect, and the success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined based on the selection result, or the player may perform a selection operation. Even if not (when not selected), success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined.

  Also, when the number of digested games in the ART state reaches a specific number of ceiling games (the number of XR ceiling games described later), the winning of the XR mode is determined.

  Further, in a game in an ART state other than the above-described various game modes, when a lottery for shifting to the rocket mode is won, the sub game state shifts to the rocket mode.

  In the ART state, normally, when the game for XR mode is won for the transition to the XRC mode, the sub gaming state shifts to the XRC mode. However, although the probability is very low, the sub gaming state is the XR mode. In some cases, the XRC mode may be entered directly without going through.

  Below, each game content of XR mode, XRC mode, and rocket mode is demonstrated.

(1) XR mode In the game of XR mode (predetermined mode), a continuous lottery of XR mode is performed for each game, and it is determined as the first game of the XR mode until it is leaked (non-winning). The predetermined number of basic ART games is added to the number of currently remaining ART games (hereinafter referred to as the number of remaining ART games). In the present embodiment, any one of 5, 10, 20, and 30 games is selected as the number of basic ART games.

  In the XR mode, a plurality of types of continuation modes (XR continuation modes) having different XR continuation rates (50% to 95%) are provided. In addition, when a rare role is won internally in XR mode, it will be a 100% chance of winning regardless of the XR continuation mode. However, if a role other than a rare role is won internally, it depends on the XR continuation mode. XR continuity rates are different.

  In addition, in the XR mode game, when the rare role is won, an additional number of ART games is added separately from the above-mentioned basic ART game number.

  Furthermore, in the XR mode game, a predetermined addition parameter called “number of combos” is provided, and when the number of combos reaches a specified number (specific number of combos), the number of basic ART games and the number of ART games associated with rare roles are determined. In addition to the additional addition, an additional addition of the number of ART games is further performed (hereinafter, this privilege is referred to as a combo bonus). In the present embodiment, the number of combos is not only incremented by 1 for each unit game in the XR mode, but is also incremented by 1 when a rare combination is won (combination number addition). That is, when a rare combination is won internally in a unit game in the XR mode, the total number of combos is increased by two.

  Further, in the XR mode game, when the number of XR continuing games becomes 2 or more, a lottery for shifting to each game and XRC mode is performed, and when the lottery is won, the shift to the XRC mode is confirmed. At this time, when the rare combination is won internally, the lottery value of the XRC mode transition lottery is appropriately set so that the XRC mode transition lottery is easily won.

  As described above, when a rare role is won in an XR mode game, the unit game is given a privilege of winning an XR continuous lottery (deciding to continue) and an additional number of ART games, and a combo bonus The number of combos that define the occurrence condition is additionally added (combo addition). Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the number of unit games (the number of digested games) until the number of combos reaches the specified number and the combo bonus is generated decreases, and the combo bonus is easily generated. In other words, in this embodiment, when a rare role is won in a game in XR mode, it is possible to affect the form of the additional operation (generation of combo bonus) of the number of ART games in the subsequent games, and the relationship between games It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) XRC mode In the XRC mode (specific mode) game, as in the XR mode, a continuous lottery of each game and the XRC mode is performed, and until the number of ART games is leaked (becomes non-winning), , Is added. However, the number of ART games added in the XRC mode is different from that in the XR mode.

  Specifically, in the game in the XRC mode, an ART game number is added every time the game and the reels are stopped, and an ART game number is added after the third stop. In the XRC mode, a predetermined effect including a reel action (continuous game lock) is performed in conjunction with the addition operation of these ART games.

  Specifically, the number of ART games to be added each time the reel is stopped is determined according to the content (number of times of locking) of the reel action (continuous game lock) determined at the start of the game (at the time of lever operation). The Next, by executing the determined reel action during the reel acceleration period, the number of ART games to be added each time the reel is stopped is notified. At this time, in this embodiment, the number of added games determined in accordance with the content of the reel action is notified to the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Thereafter, each time the reels are stopped, the number of added games determined according to the content of the reel action is added to the number of remaining ART games. At this time, every time the reel is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a specific character appears and performs a predetermined action) and is determined according to the content of the reel action. The number of added games is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  After the third stop, an effect (combination effect) that combines the contents of the effect performed for each reel is performed, and the number of ART games corresponding to the combination effect is added to the number of remaining ART games. At this time, the number of ART games to be added according to the combination effect is also notified to the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, the additional number of ART games corresponding to this combination effect is determined by lottery at the time of lever operation.

  Then, after the third stop, if the XRC mode is continued by operating the lever of the next game, the above-mentioned notification of the number of ART games added at each reel stop by the reel action, the effect at each reel stop, and the number of ART games The addition process, the combination effect after the third stop and the addition process of the number of ART games are repeated. In the present embodiment, the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed at least two games from the start of the XRC mode game.

  In this embodiment, in the XRC mode game, a reel action (continuous game lock) is always performed at the start of the game. Therefore, the continuous lottery in the XRC mode is also used for the continuous game lock lottery performed by the main CPU 51 at the start of the game, and when the continuous game lock lottery is won, the continuation of the XRC mode is won.

  In the present embodiment, as a transition form from the ART state to the XRC mode, a form transitioning from the ART state to the XRC mode via the XR mode, and a form transitioning directly from the ART state to the XRC mode without going through the XR mode, Is provided.

  In the former transition mode, there are two transition modes from the XR mode to the XRC mode. The transition mode is a method of managing the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation status of the XRC mode described below. Will be described in detail.

  Further, as described in the game lock lottery table (No. 5) in FIG. 56, the latter transition mode wins the lock number 4 (wins the winning number “1”) in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) and Corresponds to the transition mode to the XRC mode when the middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time, or when the lock number 5 is won (winning the winning number “1”) and the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time. .

(3) XRC mode transition mode and XRC mode operation status management method As described above, the XRC mode always involves a reel action, so the main CPU 51 also shifts to the XRC mode and operates in the XRC mode. Manage the situation. Therefore, in this embodiment, a parameter called “effect state (0 to 6)” is set to manage these situations. The value of the effect state is stored in the main RAM 53.

  The production state 0 to the production state 2 correspond to a state in which the occurrence probability of the reel action provided in the XR mode is different (hereinafter also referred to as a lock state), and the production state 2 corresponds to the XRC mode winning state. And in this production state 2, if the value of the production game counter for managing the number of precursor games in the XRC mode becomes 0, the game in the XRC mode is started.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as described in the correspondence table of FIG. 66, the transition between the lock states is determined by a combination of the internal winning combination and the pressing order of the stop button. For example, in the state where the internal winning combination of the winning numbers (data pointers) 32 to 35 is won, the transition state of the lock state (“reset”, “maintain” or “one stage UP”) differs depending on the reel stop order. . In the XR mode, when the lock state is reset, the effect state shifts to the effect state 0, and when the lock state is maintained, the effect state is also maintained. Further, when the lock state is raised by one stage in the production state 0, the production state shifts to the production state 1, and when the lock state is raised by one stage in the production state 1, the production state is the production state 2 Migrate to That is, if the locked state can be improved by two stages from the production state 0, the winning state of the XRC mode is set.

  The production state 3 corresponds to the state of the first game in the XRC mode, and the production state 4 corresponds to the state of the second game in the XRC mode. In the performance states 3 and 4, since the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed, in each state, each lottery value defined in the lottery table during the continuous lock state (see FIG. 57) is set to make the continuation rate 100%. Is doubled.

  The production state 5 corresponds to a state after the third game in the XRC mode, and the production state 6 corresponds to an end waiting state of the XRC mode. Therefore, the production state 6 is set when the lever is operated, and is cleared when the game ends.

  In addition, as a transition form from the XR mode to the XRC mode, a form (hereinafter referred to as a first transition form) in which a production state 2 (XRC mode winning state) is generated by raising the lock state from the production state 0 or 1 is achieved. In the production state 0 or 1, there is provided a mode (hereinafter referred to as a second transition mode) for directly shifting to the XRC mode without raising the level of the locked state.

  In the first transition mode, it is necessary to level up the lock state (the production state) one level at a time. Therefore, as described in the correspondence table of FIG. 66, not only a predetermined internal winning combination but also a stop button The sub gaming state shifts to the XRC mode only when is pressed in a predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is correct).

  In the first transition mode, “2” is set to the value of the effect game counter for managing the number of precursor games in the XRC mode, and the game in the XRC mode is started from the game one after another. In the first transition mode, when the XR mode ends during the sign game, the push order for “resetting” the lock state is notified, so the effect state is changed to the effect state 0 during the sign game. Therefore, the XRC mode game may not be started.

  On the other hand, the second transition mode corresponds to the case where the XRC direct transition lottery performed in the XR mode is won, so that the rendering state is changed from the rendering state 0 or 1 to the rendering state 2 without raising the lock state. Transition. In this case, in this embodiment, “1” is set to the value of the effect game counter, and the XRC mode game is started from the next game.

  In the ART state, the lock number 4 is won and the middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time, or the lock number 5 is won and the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, and the sub game state is changed directly from the ART state to the XRC mode. When “2” is entered, “2” is set in the effect state, and “2” is set in the value of the effect game counter. Therefore, in this case, the XRC mode game is started from the game one after another.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined internal winning combination is achieved in both the form of shifting directly from the ART state to the XRC mode, and the form of shifting from the XR mode to the XRC mode and shifting to the XRC mode. In addition to winning, it is necessary to press the stop buttons in a predetermined pressing order (correct answer). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the reel action (game lock) can be controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 that performs the push order navigation process.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a reel action (game lock) is generated, the order in which the correct answer is pushed differs according to the winning type (winning content). In the present embodiment, when the XRC mode is won, an effect suggesting whether or not to generate a reel action (an effect suggesting a transition to the XRC mode) is performed, and navigation in the order of pressing the stop button ( Hereinafter, the push order navigation is performed). At this time, the push order of the correct answer to be notified changes according to the winning type. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of correct pushing orders for generating the XRC mode, which are notified by pushing order navigation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not a reel action has occurred (XRC mode has occurred).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation status of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier called the production state, the reel control (game) is performed by the sub control circuit 42 without increasing the number of RT states. Occurrence of locking) can be controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation state of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier called the production state, but the state corresponding to each value of the above-described production state is indicated by a flag, a counter, or the like, respectively. May be provided and managed individually.

(4) Rocket mode In the rocket mode (special mode), a game is played for a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment), and a pseudo bonus is won with a very high probability during this period. Specifically, in the rocket mode, the winning combination (the internal winning combination of the winning numbers 24-29) related to the “reach eye lip” is won with high probability. Then, in the pseudo bonus lottery process in the rocket mode, if the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip”, a pseudo bonus (“BB (Don BB)” mode described later) is won with a very high probability (described below). Pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table shown in 83).

  When the symbol combination related to “reach eye lip” won in the rocket mode is stopped and displayed on the judgment line, and the stock of the pseudo bonus (“BB” mode described later) is confirmed, the pseudo bonus is stocked as a 1G continuous stock. The The stock pseudo bonuses are released together after the rocket mode is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the combination related to “reach eye lip” is stopped and displayed when the stop button is pressed in order. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the game period in the ART state other than the rocket mode, push order navigation (notification of irregular pressing) that avoids the display of the role related to “reach eye lip” is performed, and the rocket mode game period Does not perform push order navigation, or reports the push order in which the combination related to “reach eye lip” is displayed (does not notify information that avoids displaying the combination related to “reach lip”). That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 can control the symbol combination stop mode in the rocket mode game and the symbol combination stop mode in the ART game other than the rocket mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the final game during the rocket mode period, rocket mode continuous lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined number of games in the rocket mode are played again. If the pseudo bonus is not won during the rocket mode period of the predetermined number of games (when the pseudo bonus is not stocked), continuation of the rocket mode is determined with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a rocket mode capable of stocking a pseudo bonus with an extremely high probability is provided during the ART operation period. That is, in the game during the ART period, a state in which the player is very advantageous is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, the interest of the game during the ART period can be further improved.

[BGZ]
BGZ (predetermined gaming state) is a chance zone in which the above-described BG challenge occurs with high probability.

  BGZ games occur in both normal and ART states. Therefore, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as normal BGZ) after the sub gaming state has shifted from the normal state to BGZ is executed in the RT0 or RT1 gaming state. On the other hand, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as ART BGZ) after the sub game state has shifted from the ART state to BGZ is executed in the RT4 game state.

  Then, in the ART BGZ, push order navigation is performed. Note that even in the normal BGZ, push order navigation may be performed (when BGZ mode 2 described later is won).

  In addition, since the number of ART games is not subtracted during the BGZ game during ART, when the sub game state returns to the ART state after the BGZ during ART is finished, the number of ART games remaining at the time of BGZ transition is the same. ART game is resumed.

  In the BGZ, when an internal winning combination (winning numbers 38 to 41) related to “Bell” wins or a rare combination is won, a BG challenge occurs in the next game. In the BG challenge in this BGZ, success / failure may be determined in the BG challenge based on an alternative selection operation by the player, or even if the selection operation by the player is not performed ( When not selected), the success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined. In addition, in the case where a player performs an alternative selection operation in the BG challenge, one of the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R (see FIGS. 2 and 3) of the pachislot 1 is set to the player. An effect that allows you to select and touch.

  When the BG challenge is successful in the normal BGZ, the privilege of confirming the XR mode and ART is given. In BGZ, a unit game (game) of a predetermined number of games (7 games in the present embodiment) is normally performed, but in a normal BGZ game, BGZ ends with a game that has succeeded in the BG challenge. Then, when the BG challenge is successful in the normal BGZ, the sub gaming state shifts to the ART state, and an XR mode game is performed.

  On the other hand, when the BG challenge is successful in the BGZ during ART (super BGZ), a privilege of confirming the XR mode is given. Further, in the BGZ during ART, even if the BG challenge is successful, the BGZ is not terminated, and the BGZ game is played until the predetermined number of games is consumed. In the BGZ during ART, a privilege (confirmation of the XR mode) is given for each successful BG challenge for a predetermined number of games, and XR modes corresponding to the number of successful times are stocked.

  In the above-described BGZ during ART, even if the BG challenge is successful at an early stage of the predetermined number of games, the BGZ will not be completed. You can continue to enjoy it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the BGZ during ART.

  Further, in the BGZ during ART, push order navigation for winning the internal winning combination related to “Bell” is performed, so that the probability of occurrence of the BG challenge is significantly increased compared to the normal BGZ. Further, since the player can directly recognize that the probability of occurrence of the BG challenge is increased by the presence / absence of push order navigation, there is no fear of causing distrust in the game.

  In addition, in the seventh game of BGZ, even when the internal winning combination related to “Bell” wins or when the rare winning combination wins, a BG challenge occurs in the next game (eighth game), and BGZ It will be in an extended state.

[Pseudo Bonus]
The pseudo bonus (specific game state) is a sub game state executed during the RT3 game state.

  In the present embodiment, three game modes are provided in the pseudo bonus. Specifically, three types of “BB mode”, “RB mode”, and “XBB (extreme BB) mode” are provided. The RB mode is divided into two types, “NRB mode” and “SRB mode”.

  The pseudo bonus is performed when the pseudo bonus lottery process is won in the normal state or the ART state. Further, the pseudo bonus winning type (any one of the BB mode, the RB mode, and the XBB mode) is also determined by the pseudo bonus lottery process. In the present embodiment, when the RB mode is won in the ART state, the SRB mode is entered.

  Also, if the game after the sub game state has shifted from the normal state to the pseudo bonus is won, the game of the subsequent pseudo bonus is the game after the sub game state has shifted from the ART state to the pseudo bonus. A similar game is played.

  The contents of each game mode of the pseudo bonus will be described below.

(1) BB mode In this embodiment, 60 games are played in the BB mode. In the game of the BB mode, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (the internal winning combination of the winning numbers 20 to 22) related to “don alignment (lower alignment, upper alignment, diagonal alignment)” is stopped and displayed on the determination line, When a notification to that effect occurs, the winning of ART and XR mode is confirmed.

  It should be noted that the symbol combination stop display of the internal winning combination related to the “don matching” and a notification to that effect are performed when a don matching permission flag, which will be described later, is on. Further, in the BB mode, a plurality of forms of donation notification generation are prepared, and the player can select a predetermined notification generation form from among them.

  In addition, in the game of the BB mode, when the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (the internal winning combination of the winning number 23) related to “middle don complete (middle don complete)” is stopped and displayed on the determination line, the XBB mode is 1G. Stocked as a continuous stock. Then, after the BB mode game ends, the XBB mode stock is released in 1G ream.

(2) RB (NRB and SRB) mode In the game of RB (NRB and SRB) mode, the end condition is not the number of digest games, but the push order navigation performed when the role related to "Bell" is won internally. It is defined by the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the number of bell navigation). That is, in the RB mode game, the end condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the game in the RB mode ends.

  In the NRB mode, when the stay period in the NRB mode reaches a predetermined number of games, the provision of the XR mode (ART) (privilege provision) is confirmed and the transition to the SRB mode is also confirmed. In the NRB mode, an extra lottery is performed for each game and the number of bell navigations. If a rare combination is won internally, the extra number of bell navigations is won with a high probability. Then, when winning the lottery for the number of bell navigations, the number of bell navigations corresponding to the winning type is added to the number of remaining bell navigations.

  In the SRB mode, an extra lottery is performed for each game and the number of ART games, and when the lottery is won, the extra game number corresponding to the winning type is added to the remaining number of ART games. In addition, when the number of games digested in the SRB mode (the number of staying games) reaches the specific game number (when the value of the XR lottery mode in RB described later becomes “2” to “6”), a predetermined number The number of ART games will be added (except when winning a role related to “don't match permission” and “medium don permission”). For example, if the number of stay games in the SRB mode reaches a specific number of games in which the value of the XR lottery mode in RB described later is “3”, a predetermined number of ART games of 10 or more games is added. (See FIG. 127 described later).

  Further, in the RB (NRB and SRB) mode, when a specified number of games have been consumed (when a specified game described later is achieved), an XR lottery is performed. In this embodiment, an XR lottery is performed with a probability of 100%. Win the ART and win the ART. The corresponding XR mode is stocked.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus end condition is the number of times of the bell navigation, and therefore the end condition is a condition that cannot be directly defined by the number of unit game digests (in the process of digesting multiple unit games). (Conditions that change in stages). On the other hand, a privilege granting condition during the pseudo bonus period is defined by the number of times a unit game is consumed. Thus, the following effects can be obtained by making the management method of the pseudo-bonus end condition different from the management method of the privilege granting condition.

  For example, if a game is won after a transition from the normal state to the pseudo bonus (a game in the NRB mode) (when a privilege is given), a specific game in the subsequent game (a game in the SRB mode) When a number of games are consumed, a predetermined number of ART games is given as a further benefit. Therefore, for example, in the NRB mode, when an operation related to the termination condition of the RB mode, that is, when a privilege is granted without generating a bell navigation (when ART (XR) is won), In the game (the game in the SRB mode), the probability that a further privilege (addition of the ART game number) is given is increased.

  That is, in the RB mode game, the background to the ART (XR) winning (privilege grant) is important. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to get bored with the game during the game period of the RB mode, and the interest of the game in the RB mode can be further improved.

<Configuration of data table stored in sub-ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 252.

[Pseudo bonus lottery table]
First, various pseudo bonus lottery tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery table is used when performing pseudo bonus lottery in various sub game states.

  The pseudo bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between the pseudo bonus winning type set for each internal winning combination type and the lottery value.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery process using the pseudo bonus lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are stored in the pseudo bonus lottery table. The lottery value of the specified pseudo bonus winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type of the pseudo bonus at that time is won.

(1) Pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table Referring to FIGS. 69 to 74, various pseudo bonus lottery (normal) tables used in a pseudo bonus lottery process in a normal middle process (see FIG. 286 described later) described later. explain.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 1). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 1) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “0” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 2). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 2) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “1” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 3). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 3) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “2” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 4). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (part 4) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “0” and the pseudo bonus is “stock”. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 5). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 5) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “1” and the pseudo bonus is “stock”. FIG. 74 is a view showing the structure of a pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 6). The pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 6) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “2” and the pseudo bonus is “stock”.

  In this embodiment, four types of pseudo bonus lottery modes (“0” to “3”) having different types of winning bonuses, winning probabilities (lottery values) and the like are provided, but pseudo bonus lottery (normal) The table is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is any one of “0” to “2”. Further, for example, “between non-flags” in which the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69 is referred to means that no pseudo bonus is stocked in the current unit game. On the other hand, “between flags” in which, for example, the pseudo bonus lottery (ordinary) table of FIG. 72 is referred to means that the pseudo bonus is stocked in the current unit game.

  Here, the stock types of various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, “normal stock”, “priority stock”, and “1G continuous stock” are provided as stock types for various game modes. In the “normal stock”, various modes (BB, RB, XBB) in the pseudo bonus, XR mode in the ART state, BGZ, and the like are stocked. In the “priority stock”, only the XR mode is stocked. Therefore, in the following, “priority stock” will be referred to as “XR priority stock”. Furthermore, for example, a pseudo bonus won in the rocket mode is stocked in the “1G ream stock”.

  Next, the winning types of the pseudo bonus defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table will be described. In the pseudo bonus lottery (ordinary) table, RB winning (early release), RB winning (rear release), red 7BB winning (early release), red 7BB winning (rear release), and don BB winning are listed as pseudo bonus winning types. (First release), don BB win (after release), don BB win (immediate release), XBB1 win (early release), XBB1 win (post release), XBB1 win (immediate release), XBB2 win (immediate release) and non- The winner will be defined.

  “Red 7BB” and “Don BB” correspond to the pseudo-bonus BB mode, and “XBB1” and “XBB2” correspond to the pseudo-bonus XBB mode. “First release” means that the corresponding pseudo bonus is stored at the head of the normal stock. In this case, the “first release” pseudo bonus is the first among the various game stocks stored in the normal stock. To be executed. “Post-release” means storing the corresponding pseudo bonus at the end of the normal stock. In this case, after the games of various game stocks already stored in the normal stock are digested, The “release” pseudo bonus is executed. “Immediate release” means that a pseudo bonus won from the next game is started.

  The contents of the various internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table are as follows. “Outgoing 1” corresponds to a case where “out” is won during the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. The “missing 2” corresponds to a case where “losing” is won in the RT gaming state other than the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state.

  The “normal lip” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “1”. “High RT Lip” is a replay role other than “Normal Lip”.

  The “push order bell” is a small part related to “bell” that is won internally in the data pointers “39” to “41”. The “middle stage bell” is a small part related to the “bell” that is won internally in the data pointer “38”. “15 bells” is a small part related to “bell” which is won internally in the data pointer “36”.

  “Weak ice” is a small role related to “ice” which is won internally in the data pointer “42”. “Strong ice” is a small role related to “ice” which is won internally in the data pointer “43”. “MB medium role 3” is a role that is internally won by data pointers “53” to “57”. “R2 ice” corresponds to the case where the lock number “2” is won and the small combination related to “ice” of the data pointer “43” or “44” is internally won.

  “Weak cherry” is a small part related to “cherry” which is won internally in the data pointer “45”. “Strong cherry” is a small part related to “Cherry” that is won internally in the data pointer “46”. The “middle cherry” is a small part related to “cherry” that is won internally by the data pointer “47”. “Determined cherry” is a small part related to “cherry” that is won internally in the data pointer “48”.

  The “chance” is a small role that is internally won by the data pointer “49”. “MB” is a bonus that is won internally by the data pointer “50”. “MB medium role 1” is a role that is internally won by data pointers “51”, “52”, and “59” to “86”. “MB medium combination 2” is a combination that is internally won by the data pointer “58”.

  The “reach eye lips 1 and 2” are replay roles that are internally won by the data pointers “24” and “25”. The “reach eye lips 3, 4, 5” are replay roles that are internally won by the data pointers “26” to “28”.

  “Simple donation” is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer “8”. The “just middle stage donation” is a replay combination that is internally won by the data pointer “9”. The “middle middle don-match R3” corresponds to the case where the lock number “3” is won and the replay combination related to the data pointer “9” is internally won.

(2) Pseudo bonus lottery (During ART) table Various pseudo bonus lottery (During ART) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The pseudo bonus lottery (ART) table includes an ART preparation process (see FIG. 289 described later), an ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and an XR process (described later). This is used in the pseudo bonus lottery process during each process of the XR carnival mid-process (see FIG. 301 described later) described later.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 1). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 1) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “0” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 2). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 2) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “1” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 3). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 3) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “2” and the pseudo bonus is “non-stock”.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 4). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (part 4) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “0” and the pseudo bonus is “stock”. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 5). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 5) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “1” and the pseudo bonus is “in stock”. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 6). The pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 6) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “2” and the pseudo bonus is “stock”.

  75 to 80, each pseudo bonus lottery (in ART) table configuration (internal winning combination type and pseudo bonus winning type) is the pseudo bonus lottery shown in FIG. 69, etc., except for the lottery value setting mode. Since the configuration is the same as that of (normal) tables, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(3) Pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table. The pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table is used in the pseudo bonus lottery processing in the later-described confirmation screen in-process (see FIG. 306 described later).

  The various pseudo bonus winning types defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table are the same as those in the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69 and the like, and the description of the pseudo bonus winning types is omitted. To do. Also, among the various internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table, except for the “RB facile”, it is the same as that described in the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. . Note that “RB Faye rip” is a replay role that is internally won in the data pointer “16”.

(4) Pseudo bonus lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table. The pseudo bonus lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table is used in a pseudo bonus lottery process in a pseudo bonus end stand-by process described later (see FIG. 313 described later).

  Note that the various types of pseudo bonus winning types defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (waiting for completion of pseudo bonus) table are the same as those of the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. Is omitted. In addition, among the various internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery (waiting for the completion of pseudo bonus) table, except for “don't even” and “medium don's right”, the pseudo bonus lottery (normally shown in FIG. 69, etc.) ) Same as described in the table. The “don alignment permission” corresponds to the case where the replay combination related to the “don alignment” of the data pointers “20” to “22” is internally won in a state where the don alignment permission is established. Also, “middle don alignment permission” corresponds to the case where the replay combination related to “middle don alignment” of the data pointer “23” is internally won in a state where the don alignment permission is established.

(5) Pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table. The pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “3” in the pseudo bonus lottery processing in the after-rocket processing (see FIGS. 302 and 303 described later).

  The pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table configuration (internal winning combination type and pseudo bonus winning type) shown in FIG. 83 is the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 69, etc., except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, the description of these table configurations is omitted.

[XR lottery table]
Next, various XR lottery tables will be described. The XR lottery table is used when performing pseudo bonus lottery in various sub gaming states.

(1) XR lottery (normal) table FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (normal) table. The XR lottery (normal) table is used in an XR lottery process during a normal medium process (described later with reference to FIG. 286).

  The XR lottery (normal) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning opportunity parameter set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

  Note that the XR winning opportunity parameter is a parameter for determining the number of ART games to be added for each unit game and the continuation probability of the game in the XR mode and the XRC mode in the game in the XR mode and the XRC mode. That is, the XR winning opportunity parameter is a parameter for determining game contents in the XR mode and the XRC mode. Specifically, the XR winning opportunity parameter is used when determining the game contents of the XR mode and the XRC mode in an XR content lottery table (described later with reference to FIG. 139).

  In the XR lottery (normal) table, XR winning opportunity parameters 1 to 6 (priority release), XR winning opportunity parameters 1 to 4 (post release), and non-winning are defined as the XR winning opportunity parameter winning types. Note that “priority release” means that the corresponding XR mode is stocked as priority stock.

  The contents of the various internal winning combinations defined in the XR lottery (normal) table are the same as those of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination defined in the XR lottery (normal) table is omitted here.

  Here, the case where there is one type of XR lottery processing mode (XR lottery mode) will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of XR winning opportunity parameter to win, the winning probability (lottery value) A plurality of types of XR lottery modes that are different from each other may be provided. In this case, an XR lottery table may be provided for each XR lottery mode.

  In the XR lottery process using the XR lottery (normal) table, first, random values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are stored in the XR lottery table. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted for each specified XR winning opportunity parameter. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the XR winning opportunity parameter at that time is won.

(2) XR lottery (ART) table Various XR lottery (ART) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The XR lottery (ART) table shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 is used in the XR lottery processing in the later-described ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 to be described later).

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (ART) table (part 1). The XR lottery (ART) table (part 1) is referred to in cases other than the XR ceiling game. On the other hand, FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (ART) table (part 2). The XR lottery (ART) table (part 2) is referred to during the XR ceiling game.

  The configuration of each XR lottery (ART) table (internal winning combination type and XR winning opportunity parameter winning type) is the same as that of the XR lottery (ordinary) table shown in FIG. 84, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of this table configuration is omitted. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (ART) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted to determine whether or not “digits” have occurred). This is the same as the method for determining whether or not, and the description thereof is omitted.

(3) XR lottery (ART in preparation) table FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (ART in preparation) table. The XR lottery (ART in preparation) table is used in the XR lottery process in the ART preparation process (see FIG. 289, which will be described later).

  The configuration of the XR lottery (ART in preparation) table (internal winning combination type and XR winning opportunity parameter winning type) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84 except for the lottery value setting mode. Since this is a configuration, description of this table configuration is omitted. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (now preparing for ART) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, resulting in a “digit”). Since this is the same as the method for determining whether or not, the description thereof will be omitted.

(4) XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table. The XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table is used in the XR lottery processing in the later-described confirmation screen processing (see FIG. 306 described later). It should be noted that the game state “in the finalized screen” corresponds to the game state in which the pseudo bonus is being prepared.

  The configuration of the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table (internal winning combination type and XR winning opportunity parameter winning type) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84 except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, the description of this table configuration is omitted. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, resulting in a “digit”). Since this is the same as the method for determining whether or not, the description thereof will be omitted.

(5) XR lottery (in BB) table Various XR lottery (in BB) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 97. Note that the XR lottery (in BB) table is used in the XR lottery processing in the BB in-process (described later with reference to FIG. 308).

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 1). The XR lottery (in BB) table (part 1) is referred to when the don-alignment mode is “1”. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 2). The XR lottery (in BB) table (part 2) is referred to when the don alignment mode is “2”. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (part 3). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 3) is referred to when the don-alignment mode is “3”. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 4). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 4) is referred to when the don alignment mode is “4”. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 5). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 5) is referred to when the don alignment mode is “5”.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 6). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 6) is referred to when the don alignment mode is “6”. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 7). The XR lottery (in BB) table (part 7) is referred to when the don-match mode is “7”. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 8). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 8) is referred to when the don alignment mode is “8”. FIG. 97 shows the structure of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 9). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 9) is referred to when the don-match mode is “9”.

  In this embodiment, as described above, nine kinds of don-alignment modes (“1” to “9”) are provided. The value of the don-match mode is determined based on the BB XR lottery game number table (see FIGS. 106 to 108 described later).

  In the don-match mode “1” to “9”, in the 3 × 3 symbol display form formed on the display window of the liquid crystal display device 11, the symbol “DON” is a predetermined line extending from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R. The types of the top alignment (hereinafter referred to as “don alignment”), the occurrence probability (lottery value) of the don alignment, and the like are different from each other. Then, the value of the don-alignment mode is set to any of the don-unalignment permission flag, the don-alignment permission flag, and the intermediate donation permission flag in the BB medium-don alignment permission flag lottery table (see FIGS. 111 to 119 described later). Used in making decisions.

  Note that the winning types of various XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those of the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 84, so description of the pseudo bonus winning type is omitted. . Also, the various internal winning combinations defined in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those in the pseudo bonus lottery (waiting for the end of pseudo bonus) table shown in FIG. .

(6) XR lottery (waiting for pseudo bonus end) table FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (waiting for pseudo bonus end) table. The XR lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table is used in an XR lottery process during a pseudo bonus end waiting process (see FIG. 313, which will be described later).

  The structure of the XR lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table (internal winning combination type and XR winning opportunity parameter winning type) is the same as that of the above-described XR lottery (in BB) table except for the setting mode of lottery values. Therefore, the description of the table configuration is omitted. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (waiting for the end of pseudo bonus) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is subtracted in order and “digit”). Since this is the same as the method for determining whether or not a problem has occurred, the description thereof will be omitted.

(7) XR lottery (when pseudo bonus is won) table With reference to FIGS. 99 to 101, various XR lottery (when pseudo bonus is won) tables will be described. Note that the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table includes normal processing described later (see FIG. 286 described later), processing during ART described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and processing during ART preparation described later (described later). 289) and in the rocket in-process (described later in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303), it is used in the XR lottery process (when the pseudo bonus is won) performed when the pseudo bonus is won.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when a pseudo bonus is won) table (part 1). The XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (part 1) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “0”. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when a pseudo bonus is won) table (part 2). The XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (part 2) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “1”. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when a pseudo bonus is won) table (part 3). The XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (part 3) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is “2”.

  The XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning opportunity parameter set for each type of the pseudo bonus won and the lottery value.

  The type “RB” of the pseudo bonus defined in the XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table includes the RB winning (first release) and the RB winning (post release) defined in the pseudo bonus lottery table. In addition, the pseudo bonus type “BB” defined in the XR lottery (pseudo bonus winning) table includes a red 7BB winning (first release), a red 7BB winning (post release), and a don specified in the pseudo bonus lottery table. BB winning (early release), Don BB winning (post release) and Don BB winning (immediate release) are included.

  In addition, the pseudo bonus type “XBB1” defined in the XR lottery (pseudo bonus winning) table includes XBB1 winning (first release), XBB1 winning (post release), and XBB1 winning ( Immediate release) is included. Furthermore, the pseudo bonus type “XBB2” includes XBB2 winning (immediate release) defined in the pseudo bonus lottery table.

  Note that the types of XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (when pseudo bonus is won) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the type of each XR winning opportunity parameter defined in the XR lottery (when pseudo bonus is won) table is omitted here. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the above-described XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is subtracted sequentially, and “digit” is selected). Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it has occurred, its description is omitted.

(8) XR lottery (when NRB medium regulation game is achieved) table FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when NRB medium regulation game is achieved) table. The XR lottery (when the NRB prescribed game is achieved) table is used in an XR lottery process performed when the number of staying games in the NRB mode reaches the prescribed game in the NRB in-process (described later with reference to FIG. 310). The specified number of games is the number of staying games when the XR lottery mode during RB determined in the NRB during XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 109 described later) becomes “10” (in the RB during RB described later). XR lottery game number counter value).

  The XR lottery (when the NRB-prescribed game is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning opportunity parameter and the lottery value.

  Note that the types of XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (when the NRB specified game is achieved) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the type of each XR winning opportunity parameter defined in the XR lottery (at the time of achievement of the NRB prescribed game) table is omitted here. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the NRB specified game is achieved) table is also used. The XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, ”Is the same as the method for determining whether or not“ ”has occurred, and a description thereof will be omitted.

(9) XR lottery (when SRB prescribed game is achieved) table FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when SRB prescribed game is achieved) table. The XR lottery (when the prescribed game during SRB is achieved) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the number of stay games in the SRB mode reaches the prescribed game in the later-described SRB process (see FIG. 311 described later). The specified number of games is the number of stay games when the XR lottery mode during RB determined in the XR lottery game number table during SRB (see FIG. 110 described later) becomes “7” (in the RB during RB described later). XR lottery game number counter value).

  The XR lottery (when the SRB prescribed game is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning opportunity parameter and the lottery value.

  Note that the types of the XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (when the SRB prescribed game is achieved) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the type of each XR winning opportunity parameter defined in the XR lottery (at the time of achievement of the prescribed game during SRB) table is omitted here. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the SRB specified game is achieved) table is also used. The XR lottery processing method using the above-described XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, ”Is the same as the method for determining whether or not“ ”has occurred, and a description thereof will be omitted.

(10) XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table. The XR lottery (XBB continuation time) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the continuation of the XBB mode is determined in the XBB mid-process (see FIG. 312 described later).

  The XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning opportunity parameter set for each type of the XBB continuous lottery winning flag and the lottery value. In this embodiment, two types of XBB continuous lottery winning flags (“1” and “2”) are provided. XBB continuous lottery winning flags “1” and “2” respectively correspond to continuation parameters 1 and 2 defined in an XBB continuous lottery table described later (see FIG. 120 described later).

  Note that the types of XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the type of each XR winning opportunity parameter defined in the XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table is omitted here. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when XBB is continued) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery value is sequentially subtracted, resulting in a “digit”). Since this is the same as the method for determining whether or not, the description thereof will be omitted.

(11) XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table. The XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the BG challenge is successful (correct answer) in the BGZ (when winning) process (see FIG. 305 described later).

  The XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table defines the correspondence between the type of XR winning opportunity parameter set for each type of success parameter and the lottery value.

  In this embodiment, two types of success parameters (“1” and “2”) are provided. For the success parameter “2”, “both correct answer 1: non-selected correct answer 1” is determined from the contents of various correct answers defined in the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181 described later). Corresponds to the case. If the BG challenge is successful with the contents of various other correct answers, “1” is set in the success parameter.

  Note that the types of XR winning opportunity parameters defined in the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the type of each XR winning opportunity parameter defined in the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is omitted here. Also, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when BG challenge is successful) table is the same as the XR lottery processing method using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (the lottery value is subtracted sequentially, and “digit” is Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it has occurred, its description is omitted.

[BB XR lottery game number table]
Next, the BB in-game XR lottery game number table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the BB in-game XR lottery game number table, the don-match mode (1 to 9) is set based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the don-match mode map number in the later-described BB in-process (see FIG. 308 to be described later). Used in making decisions.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a configuration of the BB in-game XR lottery game number table (No. 1). In the BB XR lottery game number table (part 1) shown in FIG. 106, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don-match mode map number (1 to 43), and the don-match mode value Is defined.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a configuration of the BB in-game XR lottery game number table (No. 2). In the XB lottery game number table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 107, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don-match mode map number (44 to 86), and the don-match mode value Is defined.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BB in-game XR lottery game number table (No. 3). In the BB XR lottery game number table (part 3) shown in FIG. 108, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don-match mode map number (87 to 129), and the don-match mode value Is defined.

  The number of games (1 to 60 games) described in the leftmost column of the BB XR lottery game number table is the value of the BB remaining game number counter, and the numerical values (1 to 129) described in the top row are It is a don't-match mode map number. And the value (1-9) described in the other column in the XR lottery game number table in BB becomes the value of the don-equalized mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the BB remaining game number counter is 50 and the don-match mode map number is 15, the don-match mode “3” is determined (set).

[NRB XR lottery game number table]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a configuration of the NRB in-game XR lottery game number table. The XR lottery game number table during NRB is based on the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB and the XR lottery table mode during RB in the NRB mid-process (see FIG. 310 described later). Used when determining (0-10).

  The XR lottery game number table during NRB includes the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB (1-60 games), the value of XR lottery table mode during RB (1-26), and the value of XR lottery mode during RB (0 Specify the correspondence with 10).

  The number of games (1 to 60 games) described in the leftmost column in the XR lottery game number table in NRB is the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB, and the value described in the top row is the value in RB XR lottery table mode value (1-26). Then, the values (0 to 10) described in the other columns in the NRB in-XR lottery game number table are values in the RB in-XR lottery mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB is 30 and the XR lottery table mode during RB is 15, the XR lottery mode “10” during RB is determined (set).

[SRB XR lottery game number table]
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR lottery game number table in SRB. The XR lottery game number table during SRB is based on the value of the XR lottery game counter for RB during RB and the XR lottery table mode during RB in the later-described SRB process (see FIG. 311 described later). Used when determining (0-7).

  The SRB XR lottery game number table includes the value of the XR lottery game counter for RB (1 to 60 games), the value of the XR lottery table mode for RB (1 to 28), and the value of the XR lottery mode for RB (0 to 0). Specify the correspondence with 7). Note that the XR lottery table mode (1-28) during RB corresponds to the ART lottery game number table number (1-28) defined in the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table in FIG.

  The number of games (1-60 games) described in the leftmost column in the XR lottery game number table in the SRB is the value of the XR lottery game number counter in the RB, and the numerical value described in the top row is the value in the RB XR lottery table mode value (1-28). And the value (0-7) described in the other column in the XR lottery game number table during SRB becomes the value of the XR lottery mode during RB. Therefore, for example, if the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB is 30 and the XR lottery table mode during RB is 15, the XR lottery mode “1” during RB is determined (set).

[BB middle donation permission flag table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 119, the BB middle donation permission flag table will be described. The BB mid-don alignment permission flag table is used when determining a don-alignment permission (medium-don uniform alignment permission) flag or a non-permission flag in the don alignment permission flag lottery processing in the BB intermediate processing (see FIG. 308 described later). Used. In the present embodiment, a BB mid don alignment permission flag table is separately provided for each don alignment mode.

  111 to 119 show the configurations of the BB mid-don alignment permission flag table when the current don-alignment mode is 1 to 9, respectively.

  The BB middle donation allowance flag table is set for each type of “don donation match” that has been won internally, and “don donation disapproval”, “don donation allowance”, and “medium donation alignment allowance” win types, Define the correspondence with lottery values.

  In the don match permission flag lottery process using the BB don match permission flag table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) The lottery value for each winning type specified in the BB donation matching permission flag table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, if the current don alignment mode is “2” and the internal donation match is “upper alignment”, “don alignment not allowed” is determined with a probability of 31088/32768, and 1680/32768 The “don't match permission” is determined with the probability of.

[XBB continuous lottery table]
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XBB continuous lottery table. The XBB continuous lottery table is used when determining whether or not to continue the XBB mode in the XBB continuous lottery process during the XBB in-process (described later with reference to FIG. 312).

  The XBB continuation lottery table defines the correspondence between the continuation win / non-winner type set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value.

  When the winning type “continuation parameter 1” or “continuation parameter 2” defined in the XBB continuous lottery table is determined, it means that the XBB mode has been continued.

  The contents of the internal winning combination defined in the XBB continuous lottery table are as follows. The “don fake lower stage” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “17”. The “don fake upper stage” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “18”. The “don't fake triten” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “19”.

  The “don-aligned lower row” is a replay role that is internally won in the data pointer “20”. “Don-equalized upper row” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “21”. “Don't fake diagonal” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “22”. The “don-aligned middle stage” is a replay role that is internally won at the data pointer “23”.

  In the XBB continuous lottery process using the XBB continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is stored in the XBB continuous lottery table. Subtract sequentially by lottery value for each winning type. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is “Don-equipped lower stage”, “Continuation parameter 1” is won with a probability of 16384/32768, and the continuation of the XBB mode is determined.

[XBB stock table when XBB continues]
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the structure of the XBB stock table when XBB is continued. The XBB continuation XBB stock table is used to determine whether the XBB mode stock is won or not in the XBB continuation XBB stock lottery process in the XBB ongoing process (see FIG. 312 described later).

  The XBB continuation time XBB stock table defines the correspondence between the XBB mode stock winning / non-winning types set for each type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuous lottery winning flags and the lottery values. The XBB continuous lottery winning flags 1 and 2 correspond to the continuation parameters 1 and 2 defined in the XBB continuous lottery table in FIG. 120, respectively.

  In the XBB continuation time XBB stock lottery process using the XBB continuation time XBB stock table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) In the XBB continuation time XBB stock table, the lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, when the XBB continuous lottery winning flag 1 is set, the stock in the XBB mode is non-winning with a probability of 100%, and when the XBB continuous lottery winning flag 2 is set, the probability is 100%. The XBB mode stock wins.

[XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table]
FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB. The XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table determines the number of XBB mode stocks (including non-winning) in the XBB continuous stock lottery processing (normal) during the XBB intermediate processing (see FIG. 312 described later). Used when.

  The XBB stock table at the time of XBB continuation shows the correspondence between the types of stocks in XBB mode (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3 and 5) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value Define the relationship. Note that the type of internal winning combination specified in the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the internal winning combination type defined in the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table is omitted here.

  In the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table using the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each stock number in the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the stock number at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, it wins 1 stock with a probability of 21882/32768, 2 stocks with a probability of 10922/32768, and 3 stocks with a probability of 64/32768 To do.

[NRB middle navigation extra lottery table]
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a configuration of the lottery table on the NRB navigation. The NRB extra navigation lottery table is used when determining the extra number (including non-winning) of the number of bell navigations in the NRB extra bell navigation number extra lottery process during the NRB intermediate processing (see FIG. 310 described later).

  The NRB mid-navigation extra lottery table includes the types of the number of extra Bell navigations (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 20) and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination. Stipulates the correspondence with The type of the internal winning combination defined in the NRB in-place navigation lottery table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the NRB navigation extra lottery table is omitted here.

  In the NRB bell-navigation extra lottery process using the NRB extra-navigation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) In the NRB bell-navigation number addition lottery process, the lottery value for each additional number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the additional number at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, the player wins 2 Bell Navi with a probability of 28672/32768, wins 3 Bell Navi with a probability of 3968/32768, and wins 96/32768. Win 5 Bell Navi additions with probability and win 10 Bell Navigation additions with a probability of 32/32768.

[NRB compulsory shortened lottery table]
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a configuration of the NRB forced shortening lottery table. The NRB compulsory shortening lottery table is used when determining whether or not the compulsory shortening of the prescribed number of games is determined in the NRB compulsory game number compulsory transfer lottery processing in the following NRB in-process (see FIG. 310 to be described later). .

  The NRB forced shortening lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (winning or non-winning) for forced shortening of the specified number of games set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The type of the internal winning combination defined in the NRB forced shortening lottery table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination defined in the NRB forced shortening lottery table is omitted here.

  In the NRB prescribed game number forced transfer lottery process using the NRB forced shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. In the NRB forced shortening lottery table, the lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, the prescribed game number forced shortening is non-winning with a probability of 32964/32768, and the prescribed game number forced shortening is winning with a probability of 4/32768.

[Number of games in SRB and lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 131, the various SRB in-game number addition lottery tables will be described. The SRB in-game number addition lottery table is used when determining the addition number (including non-winning) of the ART game number in the ART game number addition lottery processing in the later-described SRB in-process (see FIG. 311 described later). .

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration of the SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 1) referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 1. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a configuration of the SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 2) referred to when the RB in-XR lottery mode is 2. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 3) referred to when the RB in-XR lottery mode is 3. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 4) referred to when the in-RB XR lottery mode is 4. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 5) referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 5. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 6) referred to when the in-RB XR lottery mode is 6. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the SRB in-game number addition lottery table (part 7) referred to when the RB in-XR lottery mode is 7.

  In the SRB in-game number addition lottery table, the ART game number addition number (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50) set for each type of internal winning combination , 100, 200, 300) and the correspondence between the lottery values. Note that the type of the internal winning combination defined in the lottery table added to the number of games in SRB is the same as that in the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the type of internal winning combination defined in the lottery table for adding the number of games in SRB is omitted here.

  In the ART game number addition lottery process using the SRB in-game number addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) In the SRB in-game number addition lottery table, the lottery value for each additional number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the additional number at that time is won.

  For example, if the XR lottery mode during RB is 1 and the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, the player will win an ART addition of 20 games with a probability of 31744/32768 and 30 with a probability of 768/32768. Wins an ART addition of games, wins an ART addition of 50 games with a probability of 224/32768, and wins an ART addition of 100 games with a probability of 32/32768.

[ART lottery game number table lottery table at the start of SRB]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a configuration of an SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table. The SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table is used in the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process in the later-described NRB mid-process (see FIG. 310 described later) and the later-described SRB mid-process (see FIG. 311 described later). Used to determine the table number.

  The SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the table number (1 to 28) and the lottery value set for each type of history of transition to the SRB mode. The table numbers (1 to 28) correspond to the RB in-XR lottery table mode (1 to 28) defined in the SRB in-XR lottery game number table of FIG.

  In the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process using the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random numbers are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each table number in the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the table number at that time is won.

  For example, when the transition to SRB mode is “transition from NRB”, table number 1 or 2 is won with a probability of 8192/32768, and table number 3 or 4 is won with a probability of 3200/32768, Table number 5 or 6 is won with a probability of 2048/32768, and table number 7 or 8 is won with a probability of 1024/32768. In this case, any of the table numbers 9 to 12 is won with a probability of 512/32768, any of the table numbers 13 to 16 is won with a probability of 256/32768, and the table number 17 with a probability of 128/32768. Any one of ˜20 wins, and any of the table numbers 21 to 24 wins with a probability of 64/32768.

[Pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table]
Next, various pseudo bonus lottery mode transition tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table includes normal processing (described later, see FIG. 286), ART preparation processing (described later, see FIG. 289), and ART processing (described later, see FIGS. 291 to 293). In the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing during each of the following XR in-process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) and XRC in-process (see FIG. 301 described later), the board lottery mode of the transfer destination is determined. Used when

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (part 1) referred to when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is zero. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (part 2) referred to when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is 1. FIG. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (part 3) referred to when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is 2. In FIG.

  The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table defines a correspondence relationship between the type (0, 1, and 2) of the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode set for each type of internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations defined in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table are the same as those in the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the internal winning combination type defined in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table is omitted here.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is simulated. The bonus lottery mode transition table sequentially subtracts the lottery value for each type of pseudo bonus lottery mode at the transition destination. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the type of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transfer destination at that time is won.

  For example, when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is 0 and the internal winning combination is “push order bell”, the transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 0 (no transition) is won with a probability of 32438/32768, A probability of 328/32768 wins the transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 1, and a probability of 2/32768 wins the shift to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 2.

[Pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when pseudo bonus ends) table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, various pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) tables will be described. The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when pseudo bonus ends) table determines the destination board lottery mode in the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing during the pseudo bonus end (winning) process (see FIG. 314 described later). Used when

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) table (part 1) referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo bonus is zero. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) table (part 2) referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is 1 at the end of the pseudo bonus. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (pseudo bonus end) table (part 3) referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo bonus is 2.

  The pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) table shows the type (0, 1, and 2) of the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode set for each pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end), and Define the correspondence with lottery values.

  In the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transfer destination in each pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (when the pseudo bonus ends) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the type of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transfer destination at that time is won.

  For example, when the current pseudo bonus lottery mode is 0 and the pseudo bonus end type is “BB end”, the transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 0 (no transition) is made with a probability of 16384/32768, The probability of 16302/32768 wins the transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 1, and the probability of 82/32768 wins the transition to the pseudo bonus lottery mode 2.

[XR content lottery table]
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR content lottery table. The XR content lottery table includes an NRB mid-process (see FIG. 310 described later), an SRB mid-process described below (see FIG. 311 below), an XBB mid-process (see FIG. 312 below), and a BGZ below ( In the XR content lottery process in each process of the process (see FIG. 305 to be described later), the contents of the game performed in the XR mode (the number of basic ART games and the XR continuation rate added for each continuation) are determined ( It is used when making a provisional decision.

  The XR content lottery table defines the correspondence between the XR mode game content type (including non-winning) set for each type of the XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) and the lottery value. The parameters 1 to 6 defined in the XR content lottery table correspond to the XR winning opportunity parameters 1 to 6, respectively.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139, 12 types of game contents in the XR mode are provided. Specifically, as a game content of the XR mode, a mode in which the number of ART basic games added for each continuation (hereinafter referred to as the number of XR basic games) is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 50%, XR basic A mode with 5 games and an XR continuation rate of 60%, a mode with 5 XR basic games and an XR continuation rate of 70%, an XR basic game number of 5 games and an XR continuation A mode in which the rate is 80%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 90%, and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 95% Provided.

  Furthermore, the game contents of the XR mode include a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 50%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 60%, A mode in which the number of basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 70%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 80%, the number of XR basic games is 10 games, and the XR A mode in which the continuation rate is 90% and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 and the XR continuation rate is 95% are provided.

  In the XR content lottery process using the XR content lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is stored in the XR content lottery table. Subtract sequentially by lottery value for each game content in XR mode. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the game content in the XR mode at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR winning opportunity parameter is “1”, the probability of 25600/32768 is that the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 50%, and 3072/32768 The probability is that the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 60%, or the mode is XR basic game number 5 and the XR continuation rate is 70%. Also, in this case, the probability of 960/32768 is that the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 80%, and the probability of 32/32768 is that the number of XR basic games is 5 games. There is a mode in which the XR continuation rate is 90% or a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 95%.

[XR basic G number lottery table]
Next, various XR basic G number lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. The XR basic G number lottery table re-determines the XR basic game number based on the internal winning combination in the XR basic G number lottery processing in the XR intermediate processing (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). ) When used.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR basic G number lottery table (part 1) referred to when the initial XR basic game number is five. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR basic G number lottery table (part 2) referred to when the initial XR basic game number is ten.

  The “initial XR basic game number” is the XR basic game number (5 or 10) determined by the XR content lottery process using the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 139. Further, in the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, the XR basic game number is changed, but the XR continuation rate is not changed.

  The XR basic G number lottery table defines the correspondence between the changed XR basic game number (5, 10, 20, and 30) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR basic G number lottery table are the same as those in the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the internal winning combination type defined in the XR basic G number lottery table is omitted here.

  In the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) In the basic G number lottery table, the XR basic game number is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of XR basic games at that time is won.

  For example, if the initial XR basic game number is 5 and the internal winning combination is “push order bell”, the probability of 32416/32768 wins the XR basic game number (no change) of 5 games, and 320 / The probability of 32768 wins the XR basic game number of 10 games, and the probability of 16/32768 wins the XR basic game number of 20 or 30 games.

[XR additional extra table]
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XR addition extra table. The XR additional addition table is used when determining the number of additional games in the ART based on the internal winning combination in the XR additional G number addition lottery processing in the later-described XR processing (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). It is done.

  The XR additional surplus table includes the types of extra games (0 (no surplus), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300, and 333) set for each internal winning combination. The correspondence relationship with the lottery value is defined. The types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR additional addition table are the same as those in the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the content of the internal winning combination type defined in the XR additional addition table is omitted here.

  In the XR extra G lot addition process using the XR additional extra table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) In the additional extra table, the lottery value for each type of extra games is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of extra games at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “push order bell”, the winning number is 3264/32768 without winning the number of games, the winning number is 100% with a probability of 2/32768, and 1/32768. With the probability of 200 games or 300 games, win the number of games.

[Combo bonus lottery table]
FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a combo bonus lottery table. The combo bonus lottery table is used when determining the number of ART games to be added with the combo bonus in the extra G number lottery processing during combo during the XR in-process (described later, see FIGS. 297 to 299).

  The combo bonus lottery table stipulates the correspondence between the type of extra game number (0 (no extra), 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100) set for each specific combo number and the lottery value. To do. The “number of specific combos” is the number of combos that triggers the generation of a combo bonus. In this embodiment, the number of specific combos is 5 combos, 7 combos, 10 combos, 15 combos, 20 combos, 25 Set 7 types of combo and 30 combo.

  In the combo bonus lottery table using the combo bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a combo bonus. In the lottery table, the number of added games is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of extra games at that time is won.

  For example, if the number of combos reaches 20 combos and a combo bonus is generated, it will win 20 games with a probability of 30720/32768, will win 30 games with a probability of 1920/32768, and a probability of 64/32768 To win 50 games or 100 games.

[XR continuous lottery table]
Next, various XR continuation lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The XR continuation lottery table is used to determine whether or not to continue the XR mode in the XR continuation lottery process in the XR continuation process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later).

  FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (part 1) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 1. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (part 2) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 2. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (part 3) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 3. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (part 4) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 4. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 5. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (No. 6) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 6. FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (part 7) referred to when the XR non-continuation flag is set.

  In the XR continuation modes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the XR continuation rates 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90 described in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. % And 95% modes are supported.

  The XR continuation lottery table defines the correspondence between the XR mode continuation winning type (winning / non-winning) set for each internal winning combination (rare combination or non-rare combination) and the lottery value.

  In the XR continuous lottery process using the XR continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is stored in the XR continuous lottery table. The lottery value for each XR continuation winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR continuation mode is 2 and the internal winning combination is “other than rare”, XR continuation is won with a probability of 19162/32768, the XR continuation mode is 2, and the internal winning combination is “ In the case of “rare role”, XR continuation is won with a probability of 100%. As is clear from this, when the XR continuation mode is 2 (corresponding to a mode with an XR continuation rate of 60%), the winning probability of XR continuation is not uniformly 60% regardless of the internal winning combination. It changes according to the type of internal winning combination. Therefore, the XR continuation rate described in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 139 indicates the difference in the XR continuation winning probability according to the type of the internal winning combination, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (rare combination), etc. It is an average XR continuation probability calculated in consideration of the above.

[XR ceiling mode transition lottery table]
Next, various XR ceiling mode transition lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table includes a later-described NRB mid-process (see FIG. 310 described later), a later-described SRB mid-process (see later-described FIG. 311), a later-described XBB mid-process (see later-described FIG. 312), and a later-described ART. In the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process during each of the middle processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later) and the later BGZ (when winning) processing (see FIG. 305 described later), the transition destination XR ceiling mode is determined. Used when

  FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (part 1) referred to when the XR mode is won in a game other than the XR ceiling game. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (part 2) referred to when the XR mode is won in the XR ceiling game.

  The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination set for each type of the current XR ceiling mode and the lottery value. In the present embodiment, eight types of XR ceiling modes 0 to 7 are provided as XR ceiling modes. Between the XR ceiling modes 0 to 7, in the various winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and added value table type) defined in the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table described in FIG. Winning probabilities are different from each other.

  In the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process using the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) In the ceiling mode transition lottery table, the lottery value for each type of XR ceiling mode of the transition destination is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the type of XR ceiling mode of the transition destination at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR mode is won in a game other than the XR mode ceiling game and the current XR ceiling mode is 0, the transition to the XR ceiling mode 1 is won with a probability of 4096/32768, and 12288 / 32768 will win the transition to XR ceiling mode 2; 14336/32768 will win the transition to XR ceiling mode 3; and the probability of 2048/32768 will win the transition to XR ceiling mode 4.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table]
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table is used when the XR ceiling basic game number and the added value table type are determined in the XR ceiling game number lottery processing 1 in the later-described ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). Used.

  The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table defines the correspondence between various types of winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and added value table type) set for each type of XR ceiling mode and the lottery values. In this embodiment, the types of XR ceiling basic games are 15 types of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400, and 500 games. Is provided. Further, two types of addition value table 1 and addition value table 2 are provided as addition value table types. This added value table type is used when determining the added value of the number of XR ceiling games using the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table described later with reference to FIG.

  In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, in the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table, the lottery value for each type of winning content is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning content type at that time is won.

  For example, when the XR ceiling mode is “2”, any one of “10 ceiling basic games, addition value table 1” to “ceiling basic games 90, addition value table 1” has a probability of 64/32768. Wins, with a probability of 3072/32768, any one of “100 ceiling basic games, addition value table 2” to “400 ceiling basic games 400, addition value table 2” wins, with a probability of 19840/32768, The winning content of “500 ceiling basic games, added value table 2” is won.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 2 tables]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table is used when determining the added value of the number of XR ceiling games in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 in the later-described ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later).

  The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table defines the correspondence between the types of various addition values (number of addition games) set for each addition value table type and the lottery values. In the present embodiment, the added value (number of added games) is any one of 1 to 100 games.

  In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, in the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table, the lottery value is sequentially subtracted for each type of addition value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the added value at that time is won.

  For example, when the added value table type is the added value table 1, the added value 1 wins with the probability of 3284/32768, and any of the added values 2 to 10 wins with the probability of 3276/32768.

[XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table]
FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table. The XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table is a replay called “carnival direct transfer lip” in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during ART) during the later-described ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later). This is used to determine whether or not to win the XR Carnival direct transition based on the internal winning combination when the winning combination is internal.

  The case where a replay role called “carnival direct transfer lip” is won internally is when the winning number “1” (F_normal lip) is won and the lock number 4 or 5 is won in the RT4 gaming state. Corresponding to

  The XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning type of the XR carnival direct transfer and the lottery value.

  In the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during ART) using the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (winning / non-winning) of XR carnival direct transfer in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155, when a replay combination called “carnival direct transition lip” is internally won, XR carnival direct transition is non-winning with a probability of 10923/32768. 21845/32768 The XR carnival direct transition will be won with a probability of.

[XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table]
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table. The XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table is based on the presence or absence of reservation in the XRC mode in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (in XR) during the XR process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). , Used to determine whether XR carnival direct transition is won or not.

  Here, the case where there is a reservation for the XRC mode means that the XRC mode is stocked, and more specifically, an XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table shown in FIG. This corresponds to the case of winning the transition to the XRC mode in the XR carnival transition lottery process (during XR).

  The XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table defines the correspondence between the XR carnival direct transfer winning / non-winning type and the lottery value set for each with and without XR carnival reservation.

  In the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (in XR) using the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (winning / non-winning) of XR carnival direct transfer in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, in the case of “with carnival reservation”, XR carnival direct transition is won with a probability of 100%. On the other hand, in the case of “no carnival reservation”, the XR carnival direct transition is non-winning with a probability of 8192/32768, and the XR carnival direct transition is winning with a probability of 24576/32768.

[XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table]
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table. The XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table is stored in the XRC mode based on the internal winning combination in the XR carnival transition lottery process (in XR) during the XR processing (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later). Used to determine whether the transition is successful or not.

  The XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table defines the correspondence between the XR carnival transition winning type (winning / non-winning) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. Note that the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table are the same as those in the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination defined in the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table is omitted here.

  In the XR carnival transfer lottery (in XR) table, the XR carnival transfer lottery process (in XR) is first extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type in the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, the player wins the XR carnival transition with a probability of 29488/32768 and wins the XR carnival transition with a probability of 3280/32768.

[XR carnival additional extra 1 lottery table]
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR carnival addition extra 1 lottery table. The XR carnival additional extra 1 lottery table is used to determine the number of additional ART games based on the number of locks in the XR carnival extra G number lottery 1 process during the XRC intermediate process (see FIG. 301 described later). Used.

  The XR carnival addition extra 1 lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of extra game number set for each type of number of locks and the lottery value.

  In the present embodiment, ten types of “0” to “9” are provided as types of the number of locks. As described above, the number of locks is a value calculated based on the remaining number of lotteries (continuous lock number) defined in the lottery table during the continuous lock state shown in FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games added to the ART based on the number of locks is set to 11 of 0 (no additional), 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 105, 120, 135, and 150 games. Set the type.

  In the XR carnival extra G number lottery 1 process using the XR carnival additional extra 1 lottery table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of added game number in the XR carnival addition extra 1 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning content type at that time is won.

  For example, when the number of times of lock is “2”, the player will win 100 additional games with a probability of 100%.

  The number of additional games specified in the XR carnival additional extra 1 lottery table is the total number of ART games added for each reel stop trigger. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing the number of additional games added by 3 is the number of games notified by the reel action at the start of the game, and is also the number of added games notified and added every time the reel is stopped.

[Add XR carnival extra 2 lottery table]
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a configuration of the XR carnival addition extra 2 lottery table. The XR carnival additional extra 2 lottery table is used when determining the additional extra game number of ART based on the internal winning combination in the XR carnival extra G number lottery 2 process in the later-described XRC intermediate process (see FIG. 301 described later). Used for.

  The XR carnival additional extra 2 lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of extra game number set for each type of internal winning combination and the lottery value.

  Note that the types of internal winning combinations defined in the XR carnival additional extra lottery table are the same as those of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination defined in the XR carnival additional extra 2 lottery table is omitted here.

  In this embodiment, 12 types of 0 (no additional), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300, and 333 games are provided as the types of additional added games of ART. .

  In the XR carnival extra extra G lottery 2 process using the XR carnival additional extra 2 lottery table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of additional game number in the XR carnival addition extra 2 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning content type at that time is won.

  For example, if the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, it will win an additional extra of 50 games with a probability of 26624/32768, will win an additional extra of 100 games with a probability of 4096/32768, and will be of 2048/32768 Win an additional 200 games with probability.

  Note that the number of additional games specified in the XR carnival additional game 2 lottery table is the number of additional games that are notified and added after the third stop. Further, in this embodiment, although not shown, the contents of the effect at the time of each reel stop and the contents of the effect at the time of the third stop (at the time of each reel stop) based on the number of additional games added determined by the XR carnival additional extra 2 lottery table Combination effect of the production contents) is determined.

[Rocket mode transition lottery table]
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the structure of a rocket mode transition lottery table. The rocket mode transition lottery table determines whether or not to shift to rocket mode based on the internal winning combination in the rocket mode transition lottery processing during ART processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later) described later. Used when

  The rocket mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of winning / non-winning of the transition to the rocket mode and the lottery value set for each internal winning combination. The type of internal winning combination defined in the rocket mode transition lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination defined in the rocket mode transition lottery table is omitted here.

  In the rocket mode transition lottery process using the rocket mode transition lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are transferred to the rocket mode. In the lottery table, the lottery value for each winning type (winning / non-winning) for shifting to rocket mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, when the role related to “displacement 2” in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is internally winning, the transition to the rocket mode is performed with a probability of 8192/32768. I will win. In other words, in the present embodiment, the internal winning combination related to “outage 2” in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is handled as a rare combination.

[Rocket mode continuous lottery table]
FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a configuration of a rocket mode continuous lottery table. The rocket mode transition lottery table is used for the rocket mode continuation lottery processing in the later rocket processing (see FIGS. 302 and 303 to be described later), based on the stock status of the pseudo bonus in the rocket mode. Used in determining There are three types of stock status of pseudo bonuses: “no stock”, “stocked” and “stock winning G” (a winning game of pseudo bonus stock).

  The rocket mode continuation lottery table defines the correspondence between the rocket mode continuation / end types set for each pseudo bonus stock status and the lottery value.

  In the rocket mode continuation lottery process using the rocket mode continuation lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) In the lottery table, the lottery value for each type of continuation / end of rocket mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type at that time is won.

  For example, when the stock status of the pseudo bonus during the rocket mode is “no stock”, the rocket mode is continued with a probability of 100%. Also, for example, when the stock status of the pseudo bonus in the rocket mode is “stocked”, the end of the rocket mode is won with a probability of 32604/32768, and the rocket mode is continued with a probability of 164/32768. To do.

[Loop lottery table at the end of ART]
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART end loop lottery table. The ART end loop lottery table is used to determine the return type (including ART end) after the ART end in the ART end loop lottery processing in the ART end processing (see FIGS. 291 to 293 to be described later). Used.

  The ART end loop lottery table defines the correspondence between the ART return type (including ART end) after the ART end and the lottery value. In this embodiment, as the ART return type, “end” (end without returning to ART), “immediate return” (return to ART state in the next game after ART end), “navigation return” (after ART end) When the navigation is executed, four types are provided: return to the ART state) and “return to a precursor” (return to a precursor game in the ART state).

  In the ART end loop lottery process using the ART end loop lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) In the end loop lottery table, the lottery value is sequentially subtracted for each ART return type. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the ART return type at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162, the ART return type “end” is won with a probability of 27848/32768, the ART return type “immediate return” is won with a probability of 3280/32768, and the probability is 164/32768. To win the ART return type “navi return”, and win the ART return type “predictive return” with a probability of 1476/32768.

[BGZ stock lottery (normal) table]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table is a BGZ mode win based on the internal winning combination and the presence / absence of a lock game in the BGZ stock lottery processing (normal time) during the normal middle processing (described later in FIG. 286). Used when determining the type (including non-winning).

  The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table includes a BGZ mode winning type (non-winning, BGZ mode 1 winning and BGZ mode 2 winning) set for each type of combination of presence / absence of lock game and internal winning combination, The correspondence with the lottery value is defined.

  BGZ stock lottery (normal time) combination type of presence / absence of lock game specified in table and internal winning combination “S None Other” is a game lock called “Short Lock” (corresponding to lock numbers 1 and 2) This corresponds to a case where the winning combination is not “chance eye” (internal winning combination corresponding to the data pointer 49). The combination type “S with chance” with the presence / absence of a lock game and the internal winning combination corresponds to the case where a short lock is performed and the internal winning combination is “chance”. The combination type “S2 R2 ice” of the presence / absence of a lock game and the internal winning combination is related to “ice” of the data pointer 43 or 44 in a state where the short lock is not performed and the lock number 2 is won. This corresponds to the case where a small role is won internally.

  “BGZ mode 1” defined in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table corresponds to BGZ without navigation, and “BGZ mode 2” corresponds to BGZ with navigation.

  In the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) using the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) in the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type of the BGZ mode at that time is won.

  For example, when the combination type of the presence / absence of a lock game and the internal winning combination is “S No chance”, the BGZ mode is not won with a probability of 24576/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is with a probability of 7864/32768. BGZ mode 2 is won with a probability of 328/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the normal state, when the BGZ mode is won, the BGZ with navigation may be won.

[BGZ stock lottery (in ART) table]
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table. The BGZ stock lottery (During ART) table includes an ART preparation process (see FIG. 289 described later), an ART process described later (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and an XR process (described later FIG. 297). ~ 299) and in the BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) in each of the following XRC in-process (see FIG. 301 described later), the winning type of the BGZ mode based on the internal winning combination and the presence or absence of the lock game Used to determine (including non-winning).

  The BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table configuration (the combination type of the presence / absence of a lock game and the internal winning combination and the winning type of the BGZ mode) is the BGZ stock lottery described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Since it is the same structure as a table (normal time), description of these table structures is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) using the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table, first, randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) in the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type of the BGZ mode at that time is won.

  For example, when the combination type of the presence / absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is “S No chance”, the BGZ mode is not won with a probability of 19456/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is with a probability of 1024/32768. Winning, BGZ mode 2 wins with a probability of 12288/32768.

[BGZ lottery game number table lottery table]
Next, various BGZ lottery game number table lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 179. The BGZ lottery game number table lottery table determines a BGZ lottery table number in a BGZ lottery game table lottery process (at the end of a pseudo bonus) during a pseudo-bonus end (winning) process described later (see FIG. 314 described later). Used when.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 1) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is one. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 2) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is two. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 3) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is three. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 4) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is four. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is five. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 6) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is six. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 7) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is seven. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 8) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is eight.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 9) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is nine. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 10) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is ten. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 11) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is eleven. FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (part 12) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 12. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (13) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 13. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 14) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 14. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 15) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 15.

  The BGZ lottery game number table lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of BGZ lottery table number (1 to 15) set for each pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end) and the lottery value.

  In the BGZ lottery game table lottery process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) using the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each BGZ lottery table number in the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the BGZ lottery table number at that time is won.

  For example, if the previous BGZ lottery table number is 1 and the pseudo bonus end type is RB end, the BGZ lottery table number 4 is won with a probability of 8754/32768, and the BGZ lottery table with a probability of 5250/32768. Number 5 wins, BGZ lottery table number 6 wins with a probability of 700/32768, BGZ lottery table number 7 wins with a probability of 8754/32768, and BGZ lottery table number 8 wins with a probability of 5250/32768 BGZ lottery table number 9 is won with a probability of 700/32768.

  Also, in this case, BGZ lottery table number 10 is won with a probability of 1500/32768, BGZ lottery table number 11 is won with a probability of 900/32768, and BGZ lottery table number 12 is won with a probability of 120/32768. BGZ lottery table number 13 wins with a probability of 500/32768, BGZ lottery table number 14 wins with a probability of 300/32768, and BGZ lottery table number 15 wins with a probability of 40/32768.

[BG challenge content lottery table]
Next, various BG challenge content lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The BG challenge content lottery table is used to determine the correct / incorrect content of the BG challenge (alternate effect) in the BG challenge content lottery processing in the BGZ mid-processing (see FIG. 304 described later). It is done. In the present embodiment, a plurality of BG challenge modes (modes 0 to 3) are provided.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge content lottery table (part 1) referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 0 or 1. FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a BG challenge content lottery table (part 2) referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 2.

  The BG challenge content lottery table defines the correspondence between the correct / incorrect answer content type of the BG challenge (two-way production) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The type of the internal winning combination defined in the BG challenge content lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, the description of the content of the internal winning combination type defined in the BG challenge content lottery table is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the correct / incorrect answer content types of the BG challenge (choice of two alternatives) are “all incorrect answers”, “left correct answer 1: non-selected correct answer 1”, and “left correct answer 1: not correct”. "Incorrect answer when selected", "Right correct answer 1: Correct answer 1 when not selected", "Right correct answer 1: Incorrect answer when not selected", "Both correct answers 1: Correct answer 1 when not selected", "Left correct answer 2: When not selected" "Correct answer 2", "Left correct answer 2: Incorrect answer when not selected", "Right correct answer 2: Correct answer 2 when not selected", "Right correct answer 2: Incorrect answer when not selected" and "Both correct answer 2: Correct answer 2 when not selected" 11 types are provided.

  In the BG challenge content lottery process using the BG challenge content lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the BG challenge content. In the lottery table, the lottery value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each correct / incorrect answer type of the BG challenge. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result is negative (“digit” is generated), the correct / incorrect content type of the BG challenge at that time is won.

  For example, when the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, as shown in FIG. 180, “Left correct answer 1: Non-selected correct answer 1”, “Left correct answer 1: One of “right answer when not selected”, “right correct answer 1: correct answer when not selected 1” and “right correct answer 1: incorrect answer when not selected” is sure to win. Further, for example, when the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is “R2 ice”, “both correct answer 1: non-selected correct answer 1” is always won.

[BG challenge mode transition table]
Next, various BG challenge mode transition tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 189. The BG challenge mode transition table is used when determining the BG challenge mode of the transition destination in the BG challenge mode transition lottery process in the later-described BGZ mid-process (see FIG. 304 described later).

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 1) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no pseudo bonus winning other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (part 2) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no pseudo bonus winning other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 3) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 4) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and a pseudo bonus is won in a game other than the final game of BGZ.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 5) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 6) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 7) that is referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and a pseudo bonus is won in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 8) which is referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and a pseudo bonus is won in the final game of BGZ.

  The BG challenge mode transition table defines the correspondence between the type (0 to 3) of the destination BG challenge mode set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. Of the various internal winning combinations stipulated in the BG challenge mode transition table, those other than “bell winning (normal)” and “bell winning (ART)” are the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) tables shown in FIG. Same as described. Note that “bell winning (normal)” corresponds to the case where a small role related to “push order bell” of data pointers “39” to “41” is internally won in a normal state, and “bell winning (ART)” is This corresponds to the case where the small combination related to the “push order bell” of the data pointers “39” to “41” is internally won in the ART state.

  In the BG challenge mode transition lottery process using the BG challenge mode transition table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) In the mode transition table, the lottery value for each type of BG challenge mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the BG challenge mode at that time is won.

  For example, if the BGZ mode is 1, there is no winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of the BGZ, and the internal winning combination is “strong ice”, the probability of 16384/32768 is shown in FIG. To win BG challenge mode 1 (no transition) and win BG challenge mode 2 with a probability of 16384/32768.

  In the present embodiment, the columns related to “push order bell” (“push order bell”, “bell prize (normal)”, and “bell prize (ART)”) in the BG challenge mode transition table are not referred to. To do. In other words, when the small winning combination related to “push order bell” is won internally, the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to.

[Push order navigation lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 237, various push order navigation lottery tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery table defines the correspondence between the win type of push order navigation and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination in a predetermined RT gaming state.

  In the push order navigation generation lottery process using the push order navigation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) Subtraction is sequentially performed with the lottery value of the winning type of the push order navigation specified in the navigation lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the winning type of the push order navigation at that time is won.

(1) Push order navigation lottery (normal) table With reference to FIGS. 190 to 193, various push order navigation lottery (normal) tables will be described. Note that the push order navigation lottery (normal) table is a push order navigation generation lottery process during each process of a normal process (see FIG. 286, which will be described later) and a pseudo bonus end waiting process (see FIG. 313, which will be described later). Used.

  FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  In the push order navigation lottery (normal) table, as the winning type of push order navigation, “left 1st navigation” (notifies that the left reel 3L is first stopped), “middle 1st navigation” (middle reel 3C is the first) Notify to stop), “Right 1st Navi” (notify that first right reel 3R is to be stopped for the first time), “Left-Middle-Right Navi” (notify the stop order of “Left Middle Right”), “Left- "Right-middle navigation" (informing the stop order of "left / right / middle"), "middle-left-right navigation" (informing the stop order of "middle / left / right"), "middle-right-left navigation" ("middle right / left" "Right-left-middle navigation" (notification of the stop order of "right-left middle"), "right-middle-left navigation" (notification of the stop order of "right-middle left") and "navigation" “Non-occurring” is defined.

  The contents of the various internal winning combinations defined in the push order navigation lottery (normal) table are as follows. The “medium correct bell” is a small part related to “bell” that is won internally in the data pointer “38”. “Right-Left-Medium correct bell” is a small part related to “Bell” which is won internally in the data pointer “39”. “Right-middle-left correct bell” is a small part related to “bell” that is won internally in the data pointer “40”. “Anomalous correct bell” is a small role related to “Bell” that is won internally in the data pointer “41”.

  “MB role (middle left and right 14) (15 remaining)” indicates that the data pointer “in the MB and the remaining payout number of medals until the end of MB is 15 (first game of MB game)” This corresponds to the case where a small role (code name “BM01”) related to “Bell” whose payout number specified in “51” or “52” is 14 is internally won. “MB role (14 left and right middle) (14 or less remaining)” is data in a situation where the remaining payout number of medals until the end of MB is 14 or less (after the second game of MB game). This corresponds to the case where a small role (code name “BM01”) related to “Bell” whose payout number specified by the pointer “51” or “52” is 14 is internally won. “MB role (14 cards for both) (remaining 15 cards)” is a data pointer “53” in a situation where the remaining payout number of medals until the end of MB is 15 (first game of MB game). This corresponds to the case where a small role related to “Bell” defined in “-57” is won internally.

  “RT2 transition-middle-left-right lip” is a replay combination that is won internally at the data pointer “3”. “RT2 transition-middle-right-left lip” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “4”. “RT2 transition-right-left-medium lip” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “5”. “RT2 transition-right-middle-left lip” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “6” or “7”.

  “RT2 transition-middle-left-right (for RT4)” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “32”. “RT2 transition-middle-right-left (for RT4)” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “33”. “RT2 transition-right-left-middle (for RT4)” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “34”. “RT2 transition-right-middle-left (for RT4)” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “35”.

  “Left middle stage don-rep-middle 1stRT0” is a replay combination that internally wins at the data pointer “10”. “Left middle donlip-right 1stRT0” is a replay combination that is internally won in the data pointer “11”. “Left don-rep-middle 1stRT4” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “12”. "Left donlip-right 1stRT4" is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer "13".

  “Left RB Rip-Medium 1stRT0” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “14”. “Left RB Lip-Right 1stRT0” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “15”. “RT3 during RT3 transition to 1st” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “30”. “RT3 transition right 1st during RT3” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “31”.

  “Now moving to direct cannibal 1st” corresponds to the case where the data pointer “1” is won internally in the RT4 gaming state and the lock number 4 is won in the game lock lottery. “Direct cannival transition right 1st” corresponds to the case where the data pointer “1” is won internally in the RT4 gaming state and the lock number 5 is won in the game lock lottery.

  “Triple aiming donlip” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “8”. “Triple aiming donlip” is a replay combination that is internally won at the data pointer “9”.

(2) Push order navigation lottery (ART) table With reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, various push order navigation lottery (ART) tables will be described. In addition, the push order navigation lottery (ART) table includes a later-described ART process (refer to FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), a later-described rocket process (refer to FIGS. 302 and 303 described later), and a pseudo bonus end standby described later. It is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during each process of the intermediate process (see FIG. 313 described later).

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as that of the above-described push order navigation lottery (normal) table except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(3) Push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table Various push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table is a push order navigation during each process of an XR process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 to be described later) and an XRC process (see FIG. 301 to be described later). Used in the generated lottery process (XR carnival transition).

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (ordinary) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(4) Push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table Various push order navigation lottery (RB shift) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205. The push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the later-described confirmation screen mid-process (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB shift) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as that of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Since it is a structure, description of these table structures is abbreviate | omitted.

(5) Push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table With reference to FIGS. 206 to 209, various push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) tables will be described. Note that the push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process in the final confirmation screen process (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB shift) table configuration (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the above-described push order navigation lottery (normal) except for the lottery value setting mode. Since the configuration is the same as the table, the description of the table configuration is omitted.

(6) Push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table Various push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213. The push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process in the final confirmation screen process (see FIG. 306 described later).

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Since it is a structure, description of these table structures is abbreviate | omitted.

(7) Push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table With reference to FIGS. 214 to 217, various push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table includes a later-described BB in-process (see FIG. 308 described later), a later-described NRB in-process (see FIG. 310 described later), and a later-described SRB in-process (described later FIG. 311). This is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process (during pseudo bonus).

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 217 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(8) Push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table Various push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the XR mid-process (described later with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299).

  FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(9) Push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table Various push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table is used in a push order navigation generation lottery process during an XR mid-process (described later with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299).

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The structure of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(10) Push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table With reference to FIGS. 226 to 229, various push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table is used in a push order navigation generation lottery process during an XR mid-process (described later with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299).

  FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(11) Push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table Various push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. The push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table is used in a push order navigation generation lottery process (BGZ mode 2) during a BGZ mid-process (see FIG. 304 described later).

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

(12) Push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table With reference to FIGS. 234 to 237, various push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (ART preparation in progress) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process (ART preparation in progress) during the later-described ART preparation process (see FIG. 289 described later).

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparation in progress) table (part 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparation in progress) table (part 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparation in progress) table (part 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. FIG. 237 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART ready) table (part 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

  The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (ART in preparation) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation win type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the lottery value setting mode. Therefore, description of these table configurations is omitted.

[Sign game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 252, various sign game number lottery tables will be described. The precursor game number lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of precursor games to be won and the lottery value set for each stock to be executed next (stock to be a precursor game). In the present embodiment, the number of precursor games to be won is one of 0 to 64 games.

  In the sign game number lottery process using the sign game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) Sequentially subtracts the lottery value of the number of precursor games specified in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

(1) Predictor game number lottery (normal) table FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (normal) table. The sign game number lottery (normal) table is used in the sign game number lottery process (normal) during the normal process described later (see FIG. 286 described later).

(2) Predictor Game Number Lottery (ART Transition) Table Next, various precursor game number lottery (ART transition) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241. The sign game number lottery (ART shift) table is used in the sign game number lottery process (ART shift) during an ART preparation process (winning) described later (see FIG. 290 described later).

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (ART transfer) table (part 1). The sign game number lottery (ART transfer) table (part 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transfer is 20 or more. FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (ART shift) table (part 2). The sign game number lottery (ART transfer) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transfer is 10 to 19 games. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the structure of a precursor game number lottery (ART shift) table (part 3). The sign game number lottery (ART transfer) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transfer is 9 games or less.

(3) Predictor Game Number Lottery (Pseudo Bonus End) Table With reference to FIGS. 242 to 245, various precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) tables will be described. The sign game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table is used in the sign game number lottery process during the pseudo bonus end (winning) process described later (see FIG. 314 described later).

  FIG. 242 is a diagram showing a configuration of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 1). The sign game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 1) is used during normal transition. FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 2). The sign game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of the ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a structure of a precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 3). The sign game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is 10 to 19 games. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the structure of a precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (No. 4). The precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (part 4) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is nine games or less.

(4) Sign game number lottery (During ART) table With reference to FIGS. 246 to 248, various sign game number lottery (During ART) tables will be described. The sign game number lottery (During ART) table is used in the sign game number lottery process (During ART, XR end) during the later-described XR release process (see FIG. 294 described later).

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number random determination (during ART) table (part 1). The sign game number lottery (ART) table (part 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is 20 games or more. FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number random determination (during ART) table (part 2). The sign game number lottery (During ART) table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is 10 to 19 games. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the structure of a precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (part 3). The sign game number lottery (in ART) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is 9 or less.

(5) Predictor game number lottery (XR end) table With reference to FIGS. 249 to 251, various precursor game number lottery (XR end) tables will be described. The sign game number lottery (XR end) table is used in the sign game number lottery process (during ART, XR end) during the later-described XR release time process (see FIG. 294 described later).

  FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (part 1). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (part 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 or more. FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (part 2). The sign game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is 10 to 19 games. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the structure of a precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 3). The sign game number lottery (XR end) table (part 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of shifting to ART is nine games or less.

(6) Predictor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the structure of a precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table. The sign game number lottery (ART end time) table is used in the sign game number lottery process (ART end time) during the later-described ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293 described later).

<Various processes for fraud etc.>
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has various coping functions when, for example, an illegal act called goto occurs. Here, various countermeasures performed in the sub-control circuit 42 when an illegal act occurs will be described.

[Countermeasure when display (winning) command is zeroed]
In the present embodiment, a sequence error detection process (determination process) of a command transmitted from the main CPU 51 to the sub CPU 81 is performed by the sub CPU 81 during a bet operation (when a medal insertion command is received). If the command display error reception process of the previous game cannot be confirmed by this command sequence error detection process, that is, if an error called display (winning) command zero is detected due to fraud, etc., at that time, Various lottery processes that should have been performed at the time of receiving the display command in the previous game (game in which the display command is zeroed) are performed. In this case, even if the goto action is performed, the next game is started in the same state as the state in which the game is normally performed. The various lottery processes at the time of display command reception performed at this time vary depending on the sub game state when the display (winning) command is generated.

  In the present embodiment, when the display (winning) command is zeroed, “navigation neglected state of first stop operation” is set as a penalty. In this case, even if an XRC mode game is won in an ART or XR mode game, the XRC mode win is forcibly invalidated (processing during ART (winning) in FIG. 296 described later) and FIG. Processing during XR (winning)).

  When the above-described method for dealing with the occurrence of the display (winning) command is adopted, even if the goto action is performed, the next game is started in the same manner as in the normal state, so that the goto action can be invalidated. Further, in this case, even if a goth act is performed, normal games (including the occurrence of a penalty) are continued, so it is possible to take measures against the goth without placing a burden on the game store.

[Countermeasure when start command zero occurs during XBB mode]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the pseudo bonus game in the XBB mode, when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state at the timing when the start command is received (the timing when the lever is operated) (when the state is invalid). Then, it is determined that an error called zero start command (a state in which reception of the start command cannot be confirmed on the sub CPU 81 side) has been detected due to an illegal act. When such a start command zero occurs, the sub gaming state is shifted from the XBB mode pseudo bonus to the BB mode pseudo bonus as a penalty.

  When such a countermeasure method at the time of occurrence of the start command is adopted, the gaming right of the pseudo bonus in the XBB mode disappears, so that, for example, illegal addition (privilege grant) in the pseudo bonus in the XBB mode is prevented. be able to.

<Various processing when status is invalid>
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has various functions for dealing with inconsistencies in the gaming state (when an illegal state occurs) in the game flow. Here, various penalty processes (state fraud process) performed in the sub control circuit 42 when a state fraud occurs will be described.

[Processing when the improper state of the "immediate release" is incorrect]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above, the winning types of the “immediate release” pseudo bonus (RT3 direct transition replay) are “Don BB” and “XBB (XBB1, XBB2). ) ”. Then, as described above, the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo-bonus is when the data pointer is “9” (in the case where the internal winning combination is “middle straight don alignment” or “middle middle don alignment R3”). )

  However, in this embodiment, when the data pointer is “9”, as shown in the correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order in FIG. 64, when the right reel 3R is first stopped, the code name “R304” ( The symbol combination of the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination related to G_RT3 transition lip_4) is controlled to stop on the effective line. Note that the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the code name “R304” (G_RT3 transition lip_4) is the symbol “DON”-“DON”-“DON” (middle dan line-up), and the XBB mode winning combination (display) Role).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the right reel 3R is first stopped in a state where the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo bonus is won (when the data pointer is “9”), the XBB mode pseudo bonus is In fact, it is a configuration that does not win a prize (a configuration in which an illegal state occurs). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo-bonus is won, a rule for first stopping all reels other than the right reel 3R is defined. ) Is ignored and the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, a pseudo bonus other than the XBB mode (a pseudo bonus in the BB mode in this embodiment) is won. In this case, a pseudo bonus in the BB mode of “Don BB” or “Red 7BB” is set as the sub gaming state.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, even if the rule (game characteristics) is ignored and the pseudo bonus is established, Therefore, the maximum profit (XBB mode game) can be prevented from being obtained by a simpler method.

  In the present embodiment, the “immediate release” don BB mode pseudo bonus is won when the data pointer is “8” (when the internal winning combination is “straight don”). In this case, as shown in the correspondence table of the internal winning combination and stop order in FIG. 64, even if the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, the stop order rule as in the XBB mode winning of “immediate release” Is not provided, and a pseudo bonus of the “immediate release” Don BB mode is awarded. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “immediate release” pseudo bonus is won (when the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (“1”)), when the right reel 3R is first stopped, The BB mode pseudo bonus is set as the sub game state regardless of the type of the “release” pseudo bonus (see the confirmation screen mid-process (winning) in FIG. 307 described later).

[Processing at the time of improper bonus winning]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which a pseudo bonus is won and “middle 1st navigation” (notification of an instruction to stop the middle reel 3C for the first stop) occurs, RT is performed after the third stop (at the time of winning). If the gaming state does not transition to the RT3 gaming state, that is, if a state fraud occurs due to ignoring navigation, the sub gaming state transitions from the next game to the pseudo bonus in the Don BB mode regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus won. (Refer to later-described process (winning) in the confirmation screen in FIG. 307). That is, even if the XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, the right to acquire the XBB mode will be lost if the navigation in the order of “middle 1st navigation” is ignored.

  By performing such a state illegal operation when winning a pseudo bonus, it is possible to prevent life from being extended between flags by ignoring push order navigation and preventing unfair profit from being enjoyed by various lotteries during the life extension period. it can. In addition, since the above-described countermeasure method when the state is invalid (navi ignore) is a technique composed of the transition process of the sub gaming state and the penalty process of the right extinction of the XBB mode, it can cope with the neglect of the navigation by a simpler technique. can do.

[Processing at the time of improper status at the end of pseudo bonus]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state at the end of the pseudo bonus (when an illegal state has occurred), when winning a prize when the sub gaming state is a bonus end standby state Processing is performed (see processing after S913 during processing at the end of a pseudo bonus (at the time of winning) in FIG. 314 described later). With this process, the normal sub gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state at the end of the pseudo bonus is set. In this state illegal process, 20 games are set in the normal penalty counter as a further penalty process. Although not shown, the value of the normal penalty counter is decremented by “1” when the start command is received when the sub gaming state is normal. In addition, when the value of the normal penalty counter is other than “0” (“1” or more), subtraction processing of the number of XR ceiling games, which will be described later, and the game state are set according to the sub game state of the game being executed. A penalty is appropriately imposed not to perform various lottery processes (pseudo bonus lottery process, XR lottery process, BGZ stock lottery process, etc. during each process) for making it easy for the player to enjoy the profit. Further, in the present embodiment, the display combination related to the push order bell and the display combination related to the code name “BM01” (G_14) by irregular pressing when the navigation does not occur (except during ART) (push order other than the first stop at the left) ) And code names “R301” (G_RT3 transition lip_1) to “R311” (G_RT3 transition lip_11) and any of the display combinations related to replay are established (display stop), Accordingly, a predetermined value is added to the value of the normal penalty counter.

  By performing the illegal state processing at the time of the end of the pseudo bonus as described above, even if the state has been changed to an abnormal RT gaming state (navigation neglected state), Since the sub gaming state can be set, the sub gaming state can be returned to the normal state without performing special processing.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input checks of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S are performed. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a random number acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts an effect random number (0 to 65535) used in the game lock lottery, and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect random numbers can be extracted.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in the random value storage area, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). In this process, the type of “game lock” is determined by lottery based on the random number for performance extracted in S5. The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the start command transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by communication data transmission processing (S337) in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. Note that the start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, mainly a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the type of “game lock” (lock number, continuous lock number) determined in the process of S7 are set. Then, the main CPU 51 waits until the lock timer becomes zero. In this embodiment, in this process, the reel acceleration pattern (normal pattern) at the normal time (non-lock effect) is also set as the reel effect pattern.

  In the process of S10, when the lock number is 1 or more, a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the lock number are set. For example, when a continuous lock number (including 0) is acquired, a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the continuous lock number are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a wait process (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses. When the reel effect pattern set in S10 is a pattern in which game lock is performed, the main CPU 51 does not execute the wait process in S11. That is, the weight process of S11 is executed only when the reel effect pattern set in S10 is a normal pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is performed by an interrupt process (see FIG. 276, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. Thereafter, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and is controlled such that the constant speed is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command transmission process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. Details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 260 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S15). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (from symbol code storage area 2 in FIG. 62) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 58). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a display combination is displayed on the active line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S17). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29), the number of inserted medals is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout. The number of sheets (payout upper limit) is 15.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S18). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves the payout end command data transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to end. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game end effect control process (S21). In this process, the effect state control process is mainly performed. Details of the game end effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S22). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

  As described above, the main control circuit 41 executes the start command transmission process (S9), the reel rotation start command transmission process (S13), and the payout end command transmission process (S19) in the main flow of the present embodiment. The In the present embodiment, as described later, in addition to these commands, various commands (for example, medal insertion command, reel stop command, display command, bonus start command, bonus end command, The non-operation command or the like) is transmitted by the main control circuit 41.

  Further, as described above, in the main flow process of the present embodiment, a game lock control process is performed (S10), and this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for controlling the lock function (lock control means).

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The determination of whether or not there is an automatic input request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic input counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic loading process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  In the process of S32, the main CPU 51 also performs a medal insertion command transmission process. In this process, the main CPU 51 saves medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by communication data transmission processing (S337) in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 14 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S35 (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal insertion command transmission processing (S37). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by communication data transmission processing (S337) in the interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later. In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is “3” regardless of the gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  After S32, when S35 is NO or when S38 is YES, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 24. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S51). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 32). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs lottery value change processing (S52). In this process, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 are changed according to the gaming state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random value storage area (S53). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table, acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for internal lottery (S54).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than “0” (negative value) (S55). When the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the calculation result is less than “0” (when S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S59 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (when S55 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the operation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S57 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes after S54.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when S57 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the winning number (S58).

  After the process of S58 or when S55 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs a winning number correction process (S59). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer when the gaming state is a non-MB (non-CB) gaming state, and when the gaming state is an MB (CB) gaming state. A value obtained by adding “51” to the value of the winning number is set as a data pointer. The details of the winning number correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 39 and 40) and acquires an internal winning combination based on the data pointer (S60).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S61). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the carryover combination storage area based on the data of bits 4 to 7 (“C_MB1” to “C_MB4”) of the internal winning combination storage area 2 (S62).

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S63). Then, after the process of S63, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing an internal winning combination determining process (internal winning combination determining means).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the lottery value changing process performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) to determine whether or not the RT0 gaming state flag is on (S71). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 0 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 59). In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT0 gaming state flag is ON (in the case where S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (FIG. 255). (Refer to S53).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S71 that the RT0 gaming state flag is not on (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is in the on state. , The lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 33) are changed (S72). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255).

[Winning number correction process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the winning number correction process performed in S59 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer (S81). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) to determine whether or not the CB (MB) is operating (S82).

  In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CB (MB) is not operating (when S82 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S84 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S82 that the CB (MB) is in operation (when S82 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds “51” to the value of the data pointer, and the added value. Is set as a data pointer (S83).

  After the process of S83 or when S82 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the game state is MB carryover and the winning number is 50 (S84). In S84, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S84 is not satisfied (when S84 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 255). Move to S60.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S84 is satisfied in S84 (when S84 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 to the data pointer (S85). After the process of S85, the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction process, and moves the process to S60 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 255).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is less than “2” (S91).

  In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is less than “2” (when S91 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIGS. 52 to 56). Then, a game lock lottery is performed based on the random number for performance (S92). When a game lock is won by this process, the main CPU 51 sets a corresponding game lock flag and lock timer. If the game lock with the lock number 4 or 5 is won, the game lock is not performed in the winning unit game (current unit game), and the stop button is pressed in the predetermined pressing order (the correct pressing order) At the next unit game. Then, after the process of S92, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S91 that the value of the effect state is not less than “2” (when S91 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is “3” or more. Is discriminated (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not “3” or more (when S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S93 that the value of the effect state is “3” or more (when S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 reads the lottery table during the continuous game lock state (see FIG. 57). The continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the effect random number (S94).

  In the processing of S94, when the value of the effect state is less than “5”, that is, when the current unit game is the unit game of the first game or the second game in the XRC mode, the main CPU 51 determines the effect lottery value. The value obtained by doubling the value is used as the effect lottery value. By this process, in the first game or the second game in the XRC mode, the continuous game lock lottery is always won and the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed.

  In the process of S94, when winning a continuous game lock lottery, the main CPU 51 sets the number of remaining lotteries won as a continuous lock number. On the other hand, when the continuous game lock lottery is not won, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the continuous lock number and “6” as the value of the effect state. In this process, even when the internal winning combination is a rare combination (including the data pointer 58), the effect lottery value is doubled and the continuous game lock lottery is always won (continuous confirmation). Good.

  After the process of S94 or S92, or when S93 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect game counter (S95). The effect game counter is a counter that manages the number of precursor games in the XRC mode.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect game counter is “0” (S96). In S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect game counter is not “0” (when S96 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process is performed in the main flow (see FIG. 253). ) To S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S96 that the value of the effect game counter is “0” (when S96 is YES), the main CPU 51 reads the lottery table during the continuous game lock state (see FIG. 57). The continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the effect random number (S97). Then, after the process of S97, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the number selection table for spinning stop (see FIG. 41), and based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. A number is acquired (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 42), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 51, corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 253). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, a description will be given of the pull-in priority storage process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  First, the main CPU 51 stores a stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S111). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S112). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S112, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S121 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S112 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S121 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S112 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S113). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S114). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storage process (S115). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 58) based on the symbol code acquired in S115 and the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) (S116). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 22 to 29) may be obtained by collating. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the drawing priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 58) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 48), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 63) (S118). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 51 adds “1” to the symbol position data and subtracts “1” from the number of symbol checks (S119).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is “0” (S120). In S120, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (when S120 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S115 and repeats the processes after S115.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S120 that the number of symbol checks is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S120), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S121).

  In S121, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S121 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S112 and repeats the processes after S112. On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of times of search (if S121 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S15 of the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S <b> 113 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 260) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a pull-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not a pull-in priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S131). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the pull-in priority table number has been set (if S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority table selection process, and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S114 of the process (see FIG. 260).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 61) and the operation stop button. With reference to the area (see FIG. 60), the corresponding pull-in priority table number is set (S132). After the process of S132, the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S114 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 260).

  In S132, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the symbol code storing process performed in S115 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storing process (see FIG. 260) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S141). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S142). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S143). The main CPU 51 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and moves the process to S116 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 260).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the reel stop control process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 performs a stop button detection process (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed, and determines whether or not the left stop button has been pressed in the first stop operation. The details of the stop button detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 264 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 61) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 60) based on the detection result of the stop button detection process in S151 (the determination result of the stop button that has been effectively pressed). Is updated (S152). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the stop button non-operating counter (S153).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S154). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S155).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S156). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves the reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S156, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 53 (S158). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the planned stop position determined in S158 as a search symbol position (S159). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code storing process described with reference to FIG. 262 (S160). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 62) using the symbol code acquired in S160 (S161).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S162). Details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when S163 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the processing of S163 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S163 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S163), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S164). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves the reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S157. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S164 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S157.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S165). In S165, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S165 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 260 (S166). . Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S151 and repeats the processes after S151.

  On the other hand, in S165, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inoperative counter is “0” (in the case where S165 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 253). (Refer to S16).

  As described above, the reel stop control process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (design variation display).

[Stop button detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the stop button detection process performed in S151 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is a pressed stop button (S171). In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no pressed stop button (when S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and the process is the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263). To S152.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is a pressed stop button in S171 (when S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button stop operation is the first stop operation. (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop button stop operation is not the first stop operation (NO in S172), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S172 that the stop button stop operation is the first stop operation (YES in S172), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed. (S173). In this process, if there is one stop button pressed in the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is the left stop button 17L. In this process, when there are a plurality of stop buttons pressed by the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is included in the plurality of pressed stop buttons. Determine.

  In S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button 17L is not pressed (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S173 that the left stop button 17L has been pressed (when S173 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the left stop button 17L as a stop button that has been effectively pressed (S174). . After the process of S174, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process, and moves the process to S152 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

  When S172 or S173 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 51 determines that a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (in the case where S175 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and the process is a reel stop control process (see FIG. 263). To S152. That is, when a plurality of stop buttons are pressed in a stop operation other than the first stop operation, or when the stop button pressed in the first stop operation does not include a left stop button, The pressing operation is treated as an invalid operation.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S175 that the plurality of stop buttons are not pressed (when S175 is NO), the main CPU 51 is the stop button for the reel being rotated. Whether or not (S176). In S176, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is not a rotating reel stop button (when S176 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and stops the process. Control proceeds to S152 of the control process (see FIG. 263). That is, when the pressed stop button is a stop button corresponding to a stopped reel, the pressing operation of the stop button is treated as an invalid operation.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S176 that the pressed stop button is a rotating reel stop button (when S176 is YES), the main CPU 51 effectively presses the pressed stop button. The stop button is set (S177). After the process of S177, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process, and moves the process to S152 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

  As described above, in S171 to S174 of the stop button detection process of the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first reel stop operation, the left stop button 17L is pressed. Is enabled, and other stop button presses are disabled. This process is executed by the main CPU 51. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines that the pressing operation of the left stop button 17L is an effective pressing operation when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first reel stopping operation. It also serves as a means to

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the slip piece number determination process performed in S156 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “10000000” in which the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00010000” in which bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). In S182, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the first stop (when S182 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processing (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S182 that the main CPU 51 is the first stop (when S182 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the forward selection table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 42). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the first stop table for forward pressing corresponding to the table selection data for forward pressing, and acquires the number-of-slip determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 51 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 42).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S188). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 performs line mask data change processing (S189). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 268 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular stop table when it is pressed, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  After the process of S183, S186, or S190, the main CPU 51 performs a priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the drawing priority order data is compared according to each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” or “1” from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S157 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the second and third stop processing performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 265) of the sliding piece number determination processing will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the main CPU 51 is at the time of the second stop operation (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 51 pushes the stop buttons in the order of pressing (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the main CPU 51 is a forward press (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S203). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S203, or when S201 or S202 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S204). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 268 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding frame number search process (S205). In this process, referring to the stop table (FIGS. 43, 45, and 46), the number of pieces of slip piece determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 51 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 265).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 267, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart (see FIG. 265) of the sliding piece number determination process and in S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). ) In S204.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S211 that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 45 and 46), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. In S213, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not ON (when S213 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit is not ON. The check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S189 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 265) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S213 is YES), the main CPU 51 The line status is set (S214). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. After the process of S214, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). ) In S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 268, the line mask data to be performed in S189 in the flowchart (see FIG. 265) of the number of sliding pieces determination process and in S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 266). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). Note that the setting of the C line status is performed in the case of forward pressing in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 271) described later.

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S222 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIG. 45) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). ) In S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S222 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data twice to the left ( S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). ) In S205.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S221 again, in S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is not set (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the B line status. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S225). In S225, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case where S225 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 265) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set in S225 (when S225 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 45 and 46) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the slip piece number determination processing (see FIG. 265) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 266). ) In S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 265) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIGS. 49 and 50) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, if the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state and the search target reel is a reel that is controlled to stop with the maximum number of sliding symbols, the initial value of the number of checks is “ 2 ”is set. In other cases,“ 5 ”is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is YES), the main CPU 51 detects the slip acquired in S234. The number of frames is saved (S237).

  After the processing of S237 or when S236 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts “1” from the number of checks and adds “1” to the search order counter (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S239). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” in S239 (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S239 (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of sliding symbols that have been retreated (S240). Then, after the process of S240, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 265).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the control change process performed in S162 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 51 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and the process is S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263). Move to.

  On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the third stop (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S253, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S252 that the main CPU 51 is not after the second stop (when S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and moves the process to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S254 that the main CPU 51 is the forward press (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 44). And the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when S258 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S259).

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not “0” in S259 (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257. On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is “0” (in the case where S259 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). After the process of S261, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

  In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the scheduled stop position (when S258 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the second forward pressing according to the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S262).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S263). After the process of S263, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 263).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 270) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 270). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 51 is a forward press (when S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S272). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 270). In S272, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is not on (in the case of NO determination in S272), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and performs the control change process (FIG. 270) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is on in S272 (when S272 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not ON (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 270) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when S273 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the stored forward push is performed. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 51 ends the second post-stop control change process and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 270).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 31) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state transition condition is not satisfied (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S282 that the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 31) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the transfer destination is set to a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  After the processing of S283, or when S282 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs display command transmission processing (S284). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores display command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The display command includes parameters that specify the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control process, and moves the process to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  As described above, the RT control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for performing RT game state transition control (replay time state control means).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the bonus end check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59) to determine whether or not “MB” is in operation (S291). In S291, when the main CPU 51 determines that “MB” is not in operation (S291 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S21.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S291 that “MB” is in operation (YES in S291), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S292).

  In S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (in the case of YES determination in S292), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end time process (S293). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active “MB”. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 14 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S294). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S295). After the process of S295, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S292 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S292 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the respective values of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Update (S296). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S297). In S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S297 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the process proceeds to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S297 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S297 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs processing at the end of the CB. (S298). Specifically, processing such as turning off the gaming state flag (CB gaming state flag) corresponding to “CB”, clearing the winning possible number counter and the gaming possible number counter, and the like are performed. Then, after the process of S298, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Game control processing at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the game end-time effect control process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is “6” (S301).

  In S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is “6” (when S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S301 that the value of the effect state is not “6” (when S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is less than “3” and RT It is determined whether or not there is a game state transition (S302).

  In S302, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S302 is satisfied (when S302 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S302 that the determination condition in S302 is not satisfied (when S302 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock number is “4” or “5”. (S303).

  In S303, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock number is “4” or “5” (when S303 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S311 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock number is not “4” or “5” in S303 (when S303 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a push order check process (S304). In this process, the main CPU 51 follows the correspondence table (only the columns of the data pointers 32 to 35) of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transition shown in FIG. 66, and the combination of the internal winning combination and stop order in the current unit game. The transition contents of the RT gaming state and the transition contents of the lock state corresponding to the are confirmed.

  After the process of S304, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the lock state is “reset” based on the result of the push order check process of S304 (S305). In S305, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the lock state is “reset” (when S305 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S305 that the transition of the lock state is not “reset” (when S305 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S307 described later.

  When S301, S302, or S305 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs an effect state reset process (S306). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the effect game counter and sets “0” as the value of the effect state. After the process of S306, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  When S305 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the lock state is “1 stage UP” and the value of the effect state is less than “2” (S307). In S307, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S307 is not satisfied (when S307 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S22.

  On the other hand, in S307, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S307 is satisfied (when S307 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the effect state (S308). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is “2” (S309).

  In S309, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not “2” (when S309 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 253). (See) S22. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S309 that the value of the effect state is “2” (when S309 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “2” in the effect state counter (S310). After the process of S310, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  Here, returning to S303 again, if S303 is YES, the main CPU 51 determines that the lock number is “4” and the first stop is the middle reel 3C, or the lock number is “5”. It is determined whether or not the condition that the first stop is the right reel 3R is satisfied (S311).

  In S311, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S311 is not satisfied (when S311 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S22. On the other hand, in S311, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S311 is satisfied (when S311 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “2” as the value of the effect state (S312).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the value of the effect state counter (S313). Then, after the process of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the bonus operation check process performed in S22 in the main flow (see FIG. 253) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “MB” is in operation (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that “MB” is not in operation (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S324 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “MB” is operating in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether “CB” is operating (S322). ). In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that “CB” is in operation (in the case where S322 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “CB” is not in operation in S322 (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 30). Is performed (S323). After the process of S323, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  If S321 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus game is winning (S324). In S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not a winning game (when S324 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S328 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S324 that the bonus game is a winning game (when S324 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 30). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S325). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 30), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 59), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“14”). Further, in this process, the CB operation process described in S323 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S326). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S327). In this process, the main CPU 51 saves data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. Note that the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 by a communication data transmission process (S337) in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After the process of S327, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

  When S324 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination relating to replay (replay) is winning (S328). In S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination relating to replay is not winning (when S328 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 253). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S328 that the combination related to replaying is a winning (when S328 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S329). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S329, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 253).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 276, an interrupt process performed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described. In the interrupt process described below, the main control circuit 41 performs a reel control process and also a transmission process of various command data. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs control processing of the symbol variation display operation and also serves as means for transmitting various command data (data transmission means).

  First, the main CPU 51 saves a register (S331). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S332). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S333). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. When the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 51 clears the game lock flag.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S334). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. The main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped. In the present embodiment, in the process of S334, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process, and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the communication data storage area of the main RAM 53 and determines whether or not there is transmission data to the sub CPU 81 (sub control circuit 42) (S335). In S335, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is data to be transmitted to the sub CPU 81 (when S335 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S337 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S335 that there is no transmission data to the sub CPU 81 (when S335 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a non-operation command transmission process (S336). In this processing, the main CPU 51 transmits a data indicating a current input status (input port on / off information) of a peripheral device (for example, a start switch, a stop switch, etc.) connected to the main control circuit 41 with a transmission command (none). As an operation command), it is stored in a communication data storage area in the main RAM 53.

  After the process of S336 or when S335 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs a communication data transmission process (S337). In this processing, the main CPU 51 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp and 7-segment drive process (S338). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register restoration process (S339). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 324. Various tables necessary for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83 and the like.

[Sub CPU power-on processing]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the power of the sub CPU 81 is turned on, a sub CPU initial setting process is executed (S341). In this processing, for example, initialization processing of the sub CPU 81, initialization processing of connected devices (IC (Integrated Circuit), LSI (Large-scale Integration), etc.), initialization processing of memory (DRAM), OS (Orerating System) The initialization process is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 issues an accessory control task activation request as a sub task activation request (S342). In the power-on processing of the sub CPU, when an activation command for the accessory control task is generated from the OS in response to the activation request for the accessory control task by the sub CPU 81, the accessory control task described later with reference to FIG. 315 is executed. .

  Next, the sub CPU 81 issues a lamp control task activation request (S343). Next, the sub CPU 81 issues a sound control task activation request (S344).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 makes a start request for the main board communication task (S345). In the power-on process of the sub CPU, when a start command for the main board communication task is generated from the OS in response to the start request for the main board communication task by the sub CPU 81, the main board communication task described later with reference to FIG. 279 is executed. .

  Next, the sub CPU 81 makes an animation task activation request (S346). In the power-on process of the sub CPU, when an animation task activation command is issued from the OS in response to the animation task activation request from the sub CPU 81, an animation task described later with reference to FIG. 323 is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a backup recovery process (S347). In this process, the sub CPU 81 stores various game data (sub game state data, number of remaining ART games, number of ceilings, etc.) stored in an SRAM (static RAM) and various history data as work DARM ( dynamic RAM). Then, after the process of S347, the sub CPU 81 ends the power-on process.

[Sub CPU power interruption processing]
Next, the power interruption processing of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is an interrupt process that is executed when, for example, a power interruption state that occurs when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is detected.

  When power interruption (reduction of power supply voltage) occurs, the sub CPU 81 performs a backup creation process (S351). In this process, the sub CPU 81 copies various data to be held from the DRAM to the SRAM when power interruption is detected. That is, the sub CPU 81 performs a process opposite to the above-described backup recovery process (S347 during the power-on process). With this processing, even if the data is destroyed, correct data is saved as backup data.

[Main board communication task]
Next, the main board communication task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 and acquires command registration data (S361). Next, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S362). In this embodiment, command data is composed of 8-byte data, and the first byte of data indicates the type of command.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the command type is a specified type (S363).

  In this embodiment, the command type is associated with one of 16 types of codes “01H” to “10H”, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is “01H” to “01H”. It will be either “10H”. Therefore, in the process of S363, if the code of the received command type is any one of “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is valid (specified type). On the other hand, if the command type code is other than “01H” to “10H”, the sub-CPU 81 determines that some abnormality (including an illegal act) has occurred during the game, and the command type is invalid. judge.

  In S363, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is not the specified type (when S363 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S361, and repeats the processes after S361. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is the specified type in S363 (when S363 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores the message in the message queue based on the received command (S363). S364). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the process of S364, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S361, and repeats the processes after S361.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 extracts a message from the message queue (S371). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S372). In S372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S 372 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S375 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S372 that there is a message in the message queue (when S372 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies game information from the message (S373). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel that has stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect content determination processing (S374). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 281 and 282 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers animation data (S375). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S376). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers lamp data (S377). Then, the sub CPU 81 registers the accessory data (S378). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S374. After the process of S378, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S371 and repeats the processes after S371.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 281 and FIG. 282, the effect content determination process performed in S374 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a medal insertion command is received (S381).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S381 that the medal insertion command is being received (S381 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a medal insertion command reception process (S382). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process for determining whether or not the above-described display (winning) command zero has occurred in the previous game, and a process for responding to the occurrence of a display command zero (goto countermeasure). Details of the medal insertion command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S382, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S381 that the medal insertion command is not received (S381 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command is received (S383).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S383 that the start command is being received (YES in S383), the sub CPU 81 performs a start command receiving process (S384). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts a random number for production, determines the production number by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the like and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the content of the production to be executed this time. The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the start command in accordance with the registered effect number (S385). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, lamp data, and accessory data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, for example, the corresponding animation data or the like is determined, and an effect such as video display is executed. Then, after the process of S385, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S383 that the start command is not received (S383 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command is received (S386).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S386 that the reel rotation start command is being received (when S386 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the effect at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command according to the registered effect number. Data is registered (S387). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S386 that the reel rotation start command is not received (S386 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (S388).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S388 that the reel stop command is being received (when S388 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the reel stop command according to the registered production number and the type of the operation stop button. The effect data at the time of reception is registered (S389). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S388 that the reel stop command is not received (S388 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command is received (S390).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S390 that the display command is being received (S390 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a display command receiving process (S391). Details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the display command according to the registered effect number and display combination (S392). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S390 that the display command is not received (when S390 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a payout end command reception (S393).

  In S393, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S393 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs payout end command reception processing (S394). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers the effect data for paying out. Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when it is determined in S393 that the sub CPU 81 is not receiving a payout end command (S393 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is a bonus start command reception (S395).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S395 that the bonus start command is being received (S395 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus start command receiving process (S396). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers effect data for starting the bonus. Then, after the process of S396, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S395 that the bonus start command is not received (when S395 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a bonus end command is received (S397).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S397 that the bonus end command is being received (S397 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a bonus end command receiving process (S398). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers effect data for ending the bonus. Then, after the process of S398, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S397 that the bonus end command is not received (S397 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a no-operation command is received (S399). In S399, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S399 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and the process is performed in S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S399 that the no-operation command is being received (when S399 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores the input port state of the main CPU 51 in a predetermined storage area in the sub RAM 83. (S400). Then, after the process of S400, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S375 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 280).

[Process when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, a medal insertion command reception process performed in S382 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) will be described.

  Note that the medal insertion command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines that a display command has been received in the previous game when a medal insertion command is received (display command reception determination unit), and that display command data has not been received. When it is determined that a predetermined process that should have been performed in the previous game (display command reception process execution means) and display command data is not received, a predetermined process is performed. It also serves as means (game regulation means) for setting a state in which the privilege granting right is lost.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a display command is received in the previous game (S411). That is, a sequence error detection process for a command transmitted from the main CPU 51 to the sub CPU 81 during a bet operation is performed. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S411 that the display command has been received in the previous game (no display (winning) command zeroing has occurred) (when S411 is YES), the sub CPU 81 inserts a medal. At the same time as the command reception process, the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S411 that no display command has been received in the previous game (a display (winning) command zero has occurred) (when S411 is NO), the sub CPU 81 The state of “1 stop operation navigation ignored” is set (S412). If the game when the display command is zeroed is an ART or XR mode game, this process forcibly disables the XRC mode win even if the XRC mode game is won (described later). (See the process during ART (winning) in FIG. 296 and the process during XR (winning) in FIG. 300 described later).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a display command reception process (S413). In other words, if a display (winning) command erasure occurs due to an illegal act such as a goto action in the previous game, the display command reception process that should have been performed in the previous game at the normal time is forcibly performed at this timing. To do. Thereby, a goto action can be invalidated. Details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S413, the sub CPU 81 ends the medal insertion command reception processing and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 281 and 282).

[Start command reception processing]
With reference to FIG. 284, the start command reception process performed in S384 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a process at the time of operating the start lever 16 corresponding to the sub gaming state (S421). In this process, various sub-game state processes (for example, a normal process in FIG. 286 described later, an ART process in FIGS. 291 to 293 described later), and the like described later are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect process such as predetermined navigation (S422). After the process of S422, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S385 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, referring to FIG. 285, the display command executed in S391 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282) and S413 in the flowchart of the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283). The reception process will be described.

  The sub CPU 81 performs a winning process corresponding to the sub gaming state (S431). In this process, various sub-game state (winning) processes described later (for example, a normal processing (winning) in FIG. 288 described later, an ART processing (winning) in FIG. 296 described later), and the like are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect of “jumping out” of the central actor (central movable unit 105) after the third stop of the stop button (after detecting the OFF edge of the third stop operation) (FIGS. 15 to 19). (S432).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S432 that the effect executed after the third stop of the stop button is not the “jump out” effect of the central actor (when S432 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the display command reception process. , And the process proceeds to S392 in the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 281 and 282), or the sub CPU 81 is called the display command reception process from the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283). In this case, the display command reception process ends, and the medal insertion command reception process also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S432 that the effect executed after the third stop of the stop button is the “jumping” effect of the central actor (when S432 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is movable centrally. A request for confirming whether or not the movable decorative cover 323 of the unit 105 is in a state of projecting to the front surface of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 (the state of FIG. 19) (hereinafter referred to as a “central actor projecting confirmation request”) (S433). Then, after the processing of S433, the sub CPU 81 ends the display command reception processing and moves the processing to S392 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 281 and 282), or the sub CPU 81 performs the display command reception processing. Is called from the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 283), the display command reception process is terminated and the medal insertion command reception process is also terminated.

[Normal processing]
Next, the normal processing performed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal middle process described below, a pseudo bonus lottery process is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo bonus lottery process is performed in various sub game states only when the sub game state is the normal state. These pseudo bonus lottery processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (special game determination means) for determining a predetermined pseudo bonus by lottery from among a plurality of types of pseudo bonus.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S441). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games that have been consumed since the end of the pseudo bonus. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the game number counter.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the expected degree of transition to BGZ in the normal state or the ART state changes according to the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus. Such a relationship between the number of digested games and the expected degree of transition to BGZ is defined by various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179). Then, when the BGZ lottery is performed with reference to the BGZ lottery table, the number of games counted in the process of S441 is referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number subtraction process (S442). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (normal) (S443). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 69 to 74), and the pseudo bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of pseudo bonus stock (between flags and non-flags), and internal winning combination Based on the above, the type of the pseudo bonus is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is won (S444).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S444 that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when S444 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S446 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S444 that the sub CPU 81 has won the pseudo bonus (when S 444 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (at the time of the pseudo bonus winning) (S445). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101), and determines whether or not the XR mode is won based on the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the pseudo bonus win type. The XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) at the time of winning is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S445 or when S444 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S446). In this process, if the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs a predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning. For example, when the current game is an XR ceiling game number game, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process or the like performed at the time of XR winning. For example, when the current game is a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus stock processing, XR lottery processing, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (normal time) (S447). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 84), and determines whether or not the XR mode is won and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning based on the internal winning combination. Determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) (S448). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table (see FIG. 163), and based on the presence / absence of a short lock (the game lock with the lock number “1” or “2”) and the internal winning combination. The type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning / non-winning and winning of BGZ stock is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (S449). The pseudo bonus immediate release flag is turned on when the type of pseudo bonus won in S443 is a pseudo bonus (don BB, XBB1, or XBB2).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S449 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (when S449 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the number of precursor games (the number of precursor games counter). (S450). Then, after the process of S450, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S456 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S449 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not on (when S449 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the number of precursor games “−1” (cleared). ) Or not (S451).

  In S451, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not “−1” (when S451 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S456 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S451 that the number of precursor games is “−1” (when S451 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of normal stock is “1” or more. Is discriminated (S452).

  In S452, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not “1” or more (when S 452 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S456 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S452 that the number of normal stock is “1” or more (when S452 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (normally) (S453). ). In this process, the sub-CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (ordinary) table (see FIG. 238), and determines the number of precursor games (0) based on the stock type to be released (type of game mode being stocked). ~ 64 games) are determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S453, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S453 is larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (S454).

  In S454, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S453 is larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (when S454 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines S456 described later. Perform the process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S454 that the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S453 is not larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (when S454 is NO), the sub CPU 81 The lottery result is set to the current number of precursor games (S455).

  After S450 or S455, if S451 or S452 is NO, or if S454 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing (S456). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135) and determines the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode based on the current pseudo bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination. The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (normal) (S457). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 190 to 193), and based on the current RT gaming state and internal winning combination, The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (S458).

  In S458, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (when S 458 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state corresponding to the pseudo bonus stock to be released and The pseudo bonus type is set (S459). By this process, the game of the pseudo bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub game state process is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S460). In this embodiment, the pseudo bonus stock won in the pseudo bonus ceiling game and the pseudo bonus stock won in other than the pseudo bonus ceiling game (normal time) are distinguished. In the present embodiment, the immediate-release pseudo bonus is won at times other than during the pseudo-bonus ceiling game (normal time), so in the process of S460, “normal” ( Information indicating that the player has won in a case other than the pseudo bonus ceiling game (normal time) is set. Then, after the process of S460, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S458 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the ON state (when S458 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a normal middle state transition process (S461). The details of the normal middle state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287 described later. Then, after the processing of S461, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal medium processing.

[Normal state transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the normal state transition process performed in S461 in the normal process flowchart (see FIG. 286) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S471).

  In S471, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when S 471 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S482 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S471 that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (when S471 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of normal stock to be released is BGZ. It is determined whether or not (S472).

  In S472, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of normal stock to be released is BGZ (when S472 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ in the sub gaming state (S473). By this process, the BGZ game is started from the next game, and the BGZ in-process shown in FIG. 304 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S473, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S472 that the type of normal stock to be released is not BGZ (when S472 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of normal stock to be released is ART. Is discriminated (S474).

  In S474, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of normal stock to be released is ART (when S474 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART ready state to the sub gaming state (S475). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and an ART preparation process shown in FIG. 289 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S475, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S474 that the type of normal stock to be released is not ART (when S474 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of normal stock to be released is a pseudo bonus. Is determined (S476).

  In S476, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is a pseudo bonus (if S476 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmed screen state to the sub gaming state (S477). With this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of pseudo bonus stock to be released to the pseudo bonus type (S478). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S479). Then, after the processing of S479, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S476 that the type of normal stock to be released is not a pseudo bonus (when S476 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of normal stock to be released is the XR mode. It is determined whether or not (S480).

  In S480, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of normal stock to be released is not the XR mode (when S 480 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S482 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S480 that the normal stock type to be released is the XR mode (when S480 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART ready state to the sub gaming state (S481). ). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and an ART preparation process shown in FIG. 289 described later is performed. Then, after the process of S481, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal medium state transition process and also ends the normal medium process (see FIG. 286).

  If S471 or S480 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state to the sub gaming state (S482). By this process, the game in the normal state is started again from the next game, and the normal medium process shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the processing of S482, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

[Normal processing (winning)]
Next, the normal mid-process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S491).

  In S491, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when S491 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal mid-process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state in S491 (when S491 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART ready state. (S492).

  In S492, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is not the ART ready state (when S 492 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal mid-process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S492 that the sub gaming state is the ART ready state (when S492 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S493). As a result of this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and processing during ART shown in FIGS.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART direct transition flag (S494). The ART direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sub gaming state is directly shifted to the ART state from the normal state. When the sub gaming state is directly transitioned from the normal state to the ART state, the ART direct transition flag is determined. “1” is set in the transition flag. Then, after the processing of S494, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal medium processing (winning).

[Processing during ART preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 289, an ART preparation process performed in the ART preparation state will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the ART flag (S501). The ART flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the ART state game. When it is determined that the ART state game is to be started, “1” is set to the ART flag.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S502). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter) in the same way as the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (S503). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and the pseudo bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of pseudo bonus stock (between flags and non-flags), and internal winning Based on the winning combination, the type of the pseudo bonus is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S504).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S504 that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when S504 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S506 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S504 that the sub CPU 81 has won the pseudo bonus (when S 504 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stocks the winning pseudo bonus and performs the XR lottery process (when the pseudo bonus is won). This is performed (S505). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101), and determines whether or not the XR mode is won based on the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the pseudo bonus win type. The XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) at the time of winning is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S505, or when S504 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S506). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, as in the process of S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), the sub CPU 81 A predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (in preparation for ART) (S507). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (ART in preparation) table (see FIG. 87), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of XR mode winning and the XR winning trigger parameter (1-6) at the time of winning ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S508). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence / absence of a short lock (the game lock with the lock number “1” or “2”) and the internal winning combination. The type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning / non-winning and winning of BGZ stock is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process (S509). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135) and determines the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode based on the current pseudo bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination. The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (in preparation for ART) (S510). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (see FIGS. 234 to 237), and determines whether or not the push order navigation is determined based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (S511).

  In S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (when S 511 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state and the stock corresponding to the pseudo bonus stock to be released A pseudo bonus type is set (S512). By this process, the game of the pseudo bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub game state process is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S513). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the ART return flag (S514). The ART return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the ART state after the game in the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode is finished. After the game in the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode is ended, the ART return flag is set. When returning, “1” is set to the ART return flag. Then, after the processing of S514, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S511 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not on (when S511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART ready state to the sub gaming state (S515). With this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started again from the next game, and the ART preparation process is performed. After the processing of S515, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process.

[Processing during ART preparation (winning)]
Next, the ART preparation process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state in S521 (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART ready state. (S522).

  In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the ART ready state (when S522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparing process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S522 that the sub gaming state is the ART ready state (when S522 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S523). As a result of this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and processing during ART shown in FIGS.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stock is “1” or more (S524).

  In S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is “1” or more (when S524 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S527 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the number of XR priority stocks is not “1” or more (when S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of normal stocks is “1” or more. Is discriminated (S525).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S525 that the number of normal stocks is not “1” or more (when S525 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S525 that the number of normal stock is “1” or more (when S525 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the normal stock priority flag (S526). ). The normal stock priority flag is a flag indicating whether or not the normal stock to be released is released with priority over the XR priority stock. When the normal stock to be released is released with priority over the XR priority stock, “1” is set in the stock priority flag.

  After the processing of S526, or when S524 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery processing (ART transition) (S527). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (see FIGS. 239 to 241), and determines the number of precursor games based on the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition and the stock type to be released. (0 to 64 games) are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) to the number of precursor games (S528). Then, after the processing of S528, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process (winning).

[Processing during ART]
Next, the ART processing performed in the ART state will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 293.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S531). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter) in the same way as the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number subtraction process (S532). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 decrements the value of the precursor game number counter by 1 in the same manner as the processing of S442 in the normal middle processing (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “immediate return” (S533).

  In S533, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “immediate return” (when S 533 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S536 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “immediate return” in S533 (when S533 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART initial game number to the ART remaining game number ( S534). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART initial game number (50 games in the present embodiment) in the ART remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S535).

  After the processing of S535 or when S533 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “precursor return” (S536).

  In S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “precursor return” (when S536 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S538 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “precursor return” in S536 (when S536 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S537). Then, after the processing of S537 or when S536 is NO, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the ART remaining game number (the value of the ART remaining game number counter) (S538).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR ceiling mode is “0” (S539).

  In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR ceiling mode is not “0” (when S 539 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S541 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that the value of the XR ceiling mode is “0” (when S539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the processing of S540 or when S539 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR ceiling games is “−1” (ceiling state) (S541). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR ceiling game number counter is “−1”.

  In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR ceiling game number is not “−1” (ceiling state) (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the XR ceiling game number (the value of the XR ceiling game number counter). ) Is subtracted by 1 (S542). Then, after the process of S542, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S546 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S541 that the XR ceiling game number is “−1” (ceiling state) (when S541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has no stock in the XR mode in the normal stock. Further, it is determined whether or not the XR priority stock has no XR mode stock (S543).

  In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S543 is not satisfied (when S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S546 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S543 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S543 (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table (see FIG. 153), and determines the XR ceiling basic game number and the added value table type by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table (see FIG. 154), and based on the addition value table type (1 or 2) acquired in S464, determines the addition value (the number of addition games). Determined by lottery. Then, the added value (number of added games) determined in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 is added to the XR ceiling basic game number determined in the sub XR ceiling game number lottery process 1, and the added value (XR ceiling) The basic game number + added value) is set to the XR ceiling game number (XR ceiling game number counter).

  After the processing of S542 or S545, or when S543 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during ART) (S546). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and the pseudo bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of pseudo bonus stock (between flags and non-flags), and internal winning Based on the winning combination, the type of the pseudo bonus is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus has been won (S547).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S547 that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when S547 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S549 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S547 that the sub CPU 81 has won the pseudo bonus (when S 547 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stocks the winning pseudo bonus and performs the XR lottery process (at the time of the pseudo bonus winning). Perform (S548). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the pseudo bonus is won) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101), and determines whether or not the XR mode is won based on the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the pseudo bonus win type. The XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) at the time of winning is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S548, or when S547 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S549). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, as in the process of S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), the sub CPU 81 A predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during ART) (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (ART) table (see FIG. 155) and determines whether or not the XR carnival direct transfer is won or not by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during ART) (S551). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 85 and 86), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of XR mode winning and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 5) at the time of winning are determined. 6) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S552). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence / absence of a short lock (the game lock with the lock number “1” or “2”) and the internal winning combination. The type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning / non-winning and winning of BGZ stock is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a rocket mode transition lottery process (S553). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 160), and determines whether or not to shift to the rocket mode by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (S554). The pseudo bonus immediate release flag is turned on when the type of pseudo bonus won in S546 is a pseudo bonus (don BB, XBB1, or XBB2).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S554 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (when S554 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the number of precursor games (the number of precursor games counter). (S555). Then, after the process of S555, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S559 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S554 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not on (when S554 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “navigation return”. (S556).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navigation return” in S556 (when S556 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S559 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S556 that the ART return type is not “navigation return” (when S556 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games (the value of the precursor game number counter) is “−1”. Is determined (cleared) or not (S557).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not “−1” in S557 (when S557 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S559 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S557 that the number of predictive games is “−1” (when S557 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR release process (S558). The details of the XR release process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After S555 or S558, if S556 is YES or if S557 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo bonus lottery mode transition processing (S559). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135) and determines the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode based on the current pseudo bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination. The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (ART) (S560). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and based on the current RT gaming state and internal winning combination, The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (internal winning combination of the data pointers 38 to 40), “RT2 transition lip” (internal winning combination of the data pointers 32 to 35) and “MB medium winning combination” ( It is determined whether or not it is one of the data pointers 32 to 35 (S561).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell”, “RT2 transition lip”, or “MB medium winning combination” (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is described later. The process of S565 is performed. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the internal winning combination is “push order bell”, “RT2 transition lip”, or “MB medium role” (when S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Determines whether the ART return type is “navigation return” (S562).

  In S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “navigation return” (when S562 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S565 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navigation return” in S562 (when S562 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART remaining game number (the value of the ART remaining game number counter). The ART initial game is set (S563). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S564).

  After the processing of S564, or when S561 or S562 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” (S565). The XR carnival direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to directly transition from the ART state to the XRC mode without going through the XR mode. When it is determined to transition directly from the ART state to the XRC mode, “1” is set in the XR carnival direct transition flag.

  In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “0” (when S565 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” in S565 (when S565 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navigation return”. It is determined whether or not (S566).

  In S566, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navigation return” (when S 566 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “navigation return” in S 566 (when S 566 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART remaining game number (the value of the ART remaining game number counter) is “ It is determined whether or not it is “0” (S567).

  In S567, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not “0” (when S567 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S567 that the number of remaining ART games is "0" (when S567 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games (the value of the precursor game number counter) is "-". It is determined whether it is “1” (clear state) (S568).

  In S568, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not “−1” (when S 568 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S568 that the number of predictive games is “−1” (when S568 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S569).

  In S569, when the sub CPU81 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not “0” (when S569 is NO), the sub CPU81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S569 that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “0” (when S569 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a loop lottery process at the end of ART (S570). . In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART end loop lottery table (see FIG. 162) and determines the ART return type (including ART end) by lottery.

  After the processing of S570, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the ART end loop lottery processing as the ART return type (S571). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “precursor return” (S572).

  In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “precursor return” (when S572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S575 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the ART return type is “precursor return” (when S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART stock at the head of the normal stock (S573). ).

  After the process of S573, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (at the end of ART) (S574). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (ART end time) table (see FIG. 252) and determines the number of precursor games (0 to 64 games) by lottery based on the stock type to be released. .

  After S574, if S565, S567 to S569, or S572 is NO, or if S566 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1” ( S575).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not “1” in S575 (when S575 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S582 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S575 that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1” (when S575 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return type is “navigation return”. It is determined whether or not (S576).

  In S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “navigation return” (when S 576 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S579 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is “navigation return” in S576 (when S576 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART initial value to the ART remaining game number (ART remaining game number counter). A game is set (S577). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S578).

  After the processing of S578 or when S576 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state and the pseudo bonus type corresponding to the contents of the normal stock (S579). With this process, the game in the corresponding sub game state is started from the next game, and the corresponding sub game state process is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the ART return flag (S580). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S581). Then, after the processing of S581, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing.

  Here, returning to S575 again, if S575 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” (S582).

  In S582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “0” (when S 582 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” in S582 (when S582 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an ART state transition process (S583). Details of the state transition process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 295 described later. Then, after the process of S583, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART process.

[XR release treatment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the XR release time process performed in S558 during the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stocks is “1” or more (S591).

  In S591, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is “1” or more (when S 591 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S594 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the number of XR priority stock is not “1” or more (when S591 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of normal stock is “1” or more. Is determined (S592).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S592 that the number of normal stocks is not equal to or greater than “1” (when S592 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR release process and performs the process during the ART (FIG. 291). (See FIG. 293). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S592 that the number of normal stock is “1” or more (when S592 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the normal stock priority flag (S593). ).

  After the processing of S593 or when S591 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (During ART, XR end) (S594). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 246 to 248), and determines the number of precursor games based on the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition and the stock type to be released. (0 to 64 games) are determined by lottery.

  Note that the XR release process shown in FIG. 294 is also performed in the later-described XR process (see FIGS. 297 to 299 described later) and the later-described XRC process (see FIG. 301 described later). In S594, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of precursor games (0 to 64 games) by lottery with reference to the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (see FIGS. 249 to 251).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (During ART, XR end) is larger than the ART remaining game number (S595).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S595 that the lottery result is not larger than the number of remaining ART games (when S595 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of precursor games (a precursor game number counter) ( S596). Then, after the process of S596, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of XR release, and moves the process to S559 of the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is larger than the ART remaining game number in S595 (when S595 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART remaining game number to the number of precursor games (a precursor game number counter). Set (S597). Then, after the process of S597, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of XR release, and moves the process to S559 of the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

[ART state transition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 295, the ART state transition process performed in S583 during the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S601).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (in the case where S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S603 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S601 that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of remaining ART games (value of the ART remaining game number counter). Whether or not is “0” is determined (S602).

  In S602, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not “0” (when S602 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition process during ART and performs the ART process (FIGS. 291 to 291). The process also ends (see FIG. 293). On the other hand, in S602, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is “0” (when S602 is YES), or when S601 is YES, the sub CPU 81 has the ART return type “ It is determined whether or not “return to navigation” is set (S603).

  When it is determined in S603 that the ART return type is “navigation return” (when S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART state transition process and also performs the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293). ) Also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S603 that the ART return type is not “navigation return” (when S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the normal stock priority flag is “0” ( S604).

  In S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the normal stock priority flag is not “0” (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S604 that the value of the normal stock priority flag is “0” (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is XR mode stock in the XR priority stock. Is determined (S605).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no XR mode stock in the XR priority stock (when S605 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S605 that the XR priority stock has XR mode stock (when S605 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S606). By this process, the XR mode game is started from the next game, and the XR in-process shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S606, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition processing during ART and also terminates the processing during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  When S604 or S605 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is BGZ (S607).

  In S607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is BGZ (when S607 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ in the sub gaming state (S608). By this process, the BGZ game is started from the next game, and the BGZ in-process shown in FIG. 304 described later is performed. Then, after the process of S608, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART state transition process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S607 that the normal stock is not BGZ (when S607 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is in the XR mode (S609).

  In S609, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is in the XR mode (when S609 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S610). By this process, the XR mode game is started from the next game, and the XR in-process shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 described later is performed. Then, after the process of S610, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition process during ART and also terminates the process during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S609 that the normal stock is not in the XR mode (when S609 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is a pseudo bonus stock (S611). . In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not a pseudo bonus stock (when S 611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S616 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the normal stock is the stock of the pseudo bonus (when S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmed screen state to the sub gaming state (S612). With this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed.

  After the process of S612, the sub CPU 81 sets a value corresponding to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released in the pseudo bonus type (S613). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S614).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “normal” to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART state transition process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  When S611 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is rocket mode stock (S616).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S616 that the normal stock is stock in the rocket mode (when S616 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub gaming state (S617). With this process, the game in the rocket mode is started from the next game, and the in-rocket process shown in FIGS. 302 and 303 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S618). Then, after the process of S618, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART state transition process and also ends the ART process (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S616 that the normal stock is not stock in the rocket mode (when S616 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state to the sub gaming state (S619). With this process, the normal game is started from the next game, and the normal mid-process shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the process of S619, the sub CPU 81 ends the state transition process during ART and also terminates the process during ART (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

[Processing during ART (winning)]
Next, the ART processing (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “navigation return” (S621).

  In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “navigation return” (when S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S624 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S621 that the ART return type is “navigation return” (when S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT4 gaming state. (S622).

  In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not a state other than the RT4 gaming state (when S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S624 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S622 that the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT4 gaming state (when S622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “immediate return” as the ART return type ( S623).

  After the processing of S623 or when S621 or S622 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (S624).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” in S624 (when S624 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” in S624 (when S624 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the first stop operation of the stop button by the player. It is determined whether or not the navigation is followed (S625).

  In S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation does not follow the navigation (when S 625 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S633 described later. If the display (winning) command has been zeroed in the previous game, the state of “ignored navigation of first stop operation” is set as a penalty at this time (see FIG. 283). (See S412 during the medal insertion command reception process), and the determination process of S625 is forcibly NO.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S625 that the first stop operation is following navigation (in the case where S625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S626). With this process, a game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and an XRC in-process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an ART return type (S627).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no ART return type in S627 (when S627 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an ART return type in S627 (when S627 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is “precursor return” (S628). .

  In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not “precursor return” (when S628 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S632 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S628 that the ART return type is “precursor return” (when S628 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an ART stock in the normal stock. (S629).

  In S629, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no ART stock in the normal stock (when S 629 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S631 described later. On the other hand, in S629, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an ART stock in the normal stock (when S629 is YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes the ART stock from the normal stock (S630).

  After the process of S630 or when S629 is NO, the sub CPU 81 clears (-1) the number of precursor games (the value of the precursor game number counter) (S631). Next, after the processing of S631 or when S628 is NO, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S632). Then, after the process of S632, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART process (winning).

  Here, the process returns to S625 again, and when S625 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the state transition process during ART described with reference to FIG. 295 (S633). Then, after the processing of S633, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing (winning).

[Processing during XR]
Next, in-XR processing performed in the XR mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the number of XR continuing games (S641). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR continuing game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter) in the same way as the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during ART) (S643). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and the pseudo bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of pseudo bonus stock (between flags and non-flags), and internal winning Based on the winning combination, the type of the pseudo bonus is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S644). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, as in the process of S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), the sub CPU 81 A predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuing game number (the value of the XR continuing game number counter) is “1” (S645).

  In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuing games is not “1” (when S645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S648 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuing games is “1” in S645 (when S645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs XR basic G number lottery processing (S646). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR basic G number lottery table (see FIGS. 140 and 141), and based on the initial XR basic G number and the internal winning combination, the number of XR basic games (5, 10, 20 and 30) is determined by lottery. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result as the number of XR basic games. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the combo counter (S647).

  Next, after the process of S647 or when S645 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during XR) (S648). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (in XR) table (see FIG. 156), and determines whether or not XR carnival direct transfer is based on the presence or absence of XR carnival reservation (presence or absence of stock in XRC mode).・ Determine non-winning by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuing game number (the value of the XR continuing game number counter) is “2” or more (S649).

  In S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuation games is not “2” or more (when S649 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the XR continuation flag (S658). The XR continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XR mode game is continued. When the XR mode game is continued, “1” is set to the XR continuation flag. After the process of S658, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S668 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S649 that the number of XR continuation games is “2” or more (when S649 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR carnival winning flag is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S650). The XR carnival winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XRC mode is won. When the XRC mode is won, “1” is set to the XR carnival winning flag.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is not “0” in S650 (when S650 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is “0” in S650 (when S650 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR carnival transition lottery process (S651). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table (see FIG. 157) and determines whether or not XR carnival transition is won or not by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR continuous lottery process (S652). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR continuation lottery table (see FIGS. 144 to 150), and continues the XR mode based on the current XR continuation lottery mode and the internal winning combination (rare or other). Winning / non-winning is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuous lottery has been won (S653).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S653 that the XR continuation lottery has been won (when S653 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S659 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S653 that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR continuous lottery (when S653 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the XR non-continuation flag (S654). The XR non-continuation flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the XR continuous lottery has been won. If the XR non-continuation lottery has not been won, “1” is set to the XR non-continuation flag.

  After the processing of S654, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (S655).

  In S655, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (when S655 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S655 that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” (when S655 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the value of the XR carnival winning flag “1”. It is determined whether or not (S656).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is “1” in S656 (when S656 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is not “1” in S656 (when S656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” in the XR continuation flag (S657). . Then, after the process of S657, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S668 described later.

  If S653, S655, or S656 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the XR continuation flag (S659). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the combo counter (S660).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combo counter is the specific number of combos (S661).

  In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S663 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S661 that the value of the combo counter is the specific number of combos (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an extra game number lottery process (S662). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the combo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 143), and determines the number of additional games (including non-winning game) by lottery based on the number of specific combos. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result to the number of games added at the time of combo.

  After the processing of S662 or when S661 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing for adding an additional number of games in XR (S663). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR additional addition table (see FIG. 142), and determines the number of additional games (including non-winning game) by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result to the number of games added in XR (normal).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the extra number of games in XR is added and the lottery is won (S664).

  In S664, when the sub CPU81 determines that the extra number of games in XR is not added and won the lottery (when S664 is NO), the sub CPU81 performs the process of S668 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S664 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR game number additional lottery (if S664 is YES), that is, if it has won the rare role, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the combo counter. 1 is added (S665).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combo counter is a specific combo number (S666).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S668 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S666 that the value of the combo counter is the specific number of combos (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an extra game number lottery process (S667). This process is performed in the same manner as the process of S662. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result to the number of games added at the time of combo.

  After the processing of S657, S658, or S667, or when S664 or S666 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S668). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence / absence of a short lock (the game lock with the lock number “1” or “2”) and the internal winning combination. The type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning / non-winning and winning of BGZ stock is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR continuation flag is “1” or the number of XR continuation games is “1” (S669).

  In S669, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S669 is not satisfied (when S669 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S669, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S669 is satisfied (when S669 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games added during combo to the number of games added in XR (total) ( S670).

  After the processing of S670, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XR basic games to the number of added games (total) during XR (S671). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games in XR (normal) to the number of additional games in XR (total) (S672). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games added in XR (total) to the number of remaining ART games (S673). In the present embodiment, the number of games is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the addition processing of S670 to S673.

  After the process of S673 or when S669 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process (S674). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135) and determines the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode based on the current pseudo bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination. The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR continuation flag is “0” (S675).

  In S675, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not “0” (when S675 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is “0” in S675 (when S675 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR release processing described with reference to FIG. 294 (S676). ).

  After the process of S676, or when S675 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (S677). In this process, when the XR carnival transition flag is in the ON state, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 198 to 201), and determines the current RT gaming state and internal Based on the winning combination, the winning / non-winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. The XR carnival transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the XRC mode is confirmed. When the transition to the XRC mode is confirmed, “1” is set to the XR carnival transition flag. .

  In the process of S677, when the XR carnival transition flag is in the off state and the value of the effect state is “0”, the sub CPU 81 determines the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (FIG. 218 to FIG. 221), the type of push order navigation win / no win and push order navigation is determined by lottery. When the XR carnival transition flag is in the off state and the effect state is “1”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (see FIGS. 222 to 225). The winning / non-winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. When the XR carnival transition flag is OFF and the effect state is “2”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 226 to 229). The winning / non-winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. Further, when the state of the main control circuit 41 and the state of the sub control circuit 42 are inconsistent, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 226 to 229) and pushes it. The type of winning / non-winning of forward navigation and push navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival transition flag is “1” (S678).

  In S678, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is “1” (when S 678 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S679). With this process, a game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and an XRC in-process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  After the processing of S679, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the XR return flag (S680). The XR return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the XR mode after the XRC mode game ends. When returning to the XR mode after the XRC mode game ends, the XR return flag is set to “1” is set. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S681). Then, after the process of S681, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is not “1” in S678 (when S678 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag “1”. Whether or not (S682).

  In S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (YES in S682), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” in S682 (when S682 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR continuation flag is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S683).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not “0” in S683 (when S683 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S684). With this process, the XR mode game is started again from the next game, and the process during XR is performed. Then, after the process of S684, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is “0” in S683 (when S683 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S685). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the process during ART shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 is performed. Then, after the processing of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR processing.

  As described above, in the in-XR process of the present embodiment, whether or not to continue the XR mode is determined by lottery (S652), and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (predetermined mode continuation determination means) for determining continuation of the XR mode by lottery. Further, in the XR in-process of the present embodiment, the number of XR basic games (first unit game number), the number of additional games in XR (ordinary) (second unit game number), and the time of combo are added according to various triggers. The number of games (third unit game number) is appropriately added to the number of remaining ART games, and these addition processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 adds means for adding these various added game numbers to the remaining ART game number (first unit game number addition means, second unit game number addition means, Also serves as a unit game number addition means). Further, in the XR in-process of the present embodiment, the combo number (predetermined addition parameter) addition process (S660 and S665) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means for adding the number of combos (addition parameter adding means).

[Processing during XR (winning)]
Next, the XR in-process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (S691).

  In S691, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not “1” (when S691 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S691 that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “1” (when S691 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the first stop operation of the stop button by the player. It is determined whether or not the navigation is followed (S692).

  In S692, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation does not follow navigation (when S692 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process (winning). If the display (winning) command has been zeroed in the previous game, the state of “ignored navigation of first stop operation” is set as a penalty at this time (see FIG. 283). (See S412 during the medal insertion command reception process), and the determination process in S692 is forcibly NO.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S692 that the first stop operation is in accordance with navigation (when S692 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode to the sub gaming state (S693). With this process, a game in the XRC mode is started from the next game, and an XRC in-process shown in FIG. 301 described later is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the ART return flag (S694). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S695). Then, after the process of S695, the sub CPU 81 ends the XR in-process (winning).

[Processing during XRC]
Next, the XRC in-process performed in the XRC mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S701). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter) in the same way as the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during ART) (S702). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 75 to 80), and the pseudo bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of pseudo bonus stock (between flags and non-flags), and internal winning Based on the winning combination, the type of the pseudo bonus is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S703). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, as in the process of S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), the sub CPU 81 A predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S704). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 164), and based on the presence / absence of a short lock (the game lock with the lock number “1” or “2”) and the internal winning combination. The type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning / non-winning and winning of BGZ stock is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC continuation flag is 1 or the value of the XRC start flag is 1 (S705). The XRC continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to continue the XRC mode. When the continuous game lock lottery process (S94, S97 in FIG. 258) is won and the continuation of the XRC mode is confirmed, “1” is set in the XRC continuation flag. The XRC start flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the XRC mode. When the XRC mode is set to the sub gaming state (for example, S693 in FIG. 300), the XRC start flag is set. “1” is set in.

  In S705, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S705 is not satisfied (when S705 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S708 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S705 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S705 (when S705 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an extra game number lottery 1 process in the XR carnival (S706). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival addition extra 1 lottery table (see FIG. 158), and determines the extra game number of ART by lottery based on the number of locks. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result to the XRC added game number (stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an extra game number lottery 2 process during the XR carnival (S707). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival addition extra lottery table (see FIG. 159), and determines the extra game number of ART by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result on the XRC and sets the number of games (lever).

  After the process of S707 or when S705 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery mode transition process (S708). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 133 to 135) and determines the transition destination pseudo bonus lottery mode based on the current pseudo bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination. The value (0-2) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (carnival shift) (S709). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 198 to 201), and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won or not based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games (stop) during XRC to the number of remaining ART games (S710). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games (lever) during XRC to the number of remaining ART games (S711).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC end flag is “2” (S712). The XRC end flag is a flag indicating whether or not to end the game in the XRC mode, and when the game shifts to the continuous game lock lottery process (S94, S97 in FIG. 258) (the continuous lottery is non-winning). ), The XRC end flag is set to “2”.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is not “2” in S712 (when S712 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S715 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is “2” in S712 (when S712 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR return flag is “0”. Is determined (S713).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S713 that the value of the XR return flag is not “0” (when S713 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S715 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is “0” in S713 (when S713 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR release process described with reference to FIG. 294 (S714). ).

  After the process of S714 or when S712 or S713 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC end flag is “2” (S715).

  In S715, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is not “2” (when S 715 is NO), that is, when the XRC mode is continued, the sub CPU 81 enters the XRC mode in the sub gaming state. Is set (S716). By this process, the XRC mode game is started again from the next game, and the process during XRC is performed. Then, after the process of S716, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during XRC.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is “2” in S715 (when S715 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR return flag is “1”. Is determined (S717).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is not “1” in S717 (when S717 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S718). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the process during ART shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 is performed. Then, after the process of S718, the sub CPU 81 ends the XRC process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S717 that the value of the XR return flag is “1” (when S717 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state (S719). With this process, the XR mode game is started from the next game, and the XR in-process shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 is performed. Then, after the process of S719, the sub CPU 81 ends the XRC process.

  As described above, in the XRC in-process according to the present embodiment, the number of extra games during XRC is added to the number of remaining ART games (S710 and S711), and these addition processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means (first addition means and second addition means) for performing various addition processes of the number of ART games performed in the XRC in-process.

[In-rocket treatment]
Next, in-rocket processing performed in the rocket mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S721). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter) in the same way as the process of S441 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1” (S722). The rocket mode continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to continue the rocket mode game after the rocket mode game for a predetermined period (50 games in this embodiment) is completed. When the game in the rocket mode is continued (for example, when the pseudo bonus is not won in the rocket mode game of 50 games), “1” is set in the rocket mode continuation flag. The rocket mode continuation flag is set in the rocket mode continuation lottery in S734 described later.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not “1” in S722 (when S722 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S725 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1” in S722 (when S722 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode initial game number to the remaining rocket mode game number. Set (S723). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode initial game number in the rocket mode remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the rocket mode continuation flag (S724).

  After the processing of S724 or when S722 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the remaining rocket mode game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is “1” or more (S725).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S725 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is not “1” or more (when S725 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S728 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S725 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is “1” or more (when S725 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MB is operating (step S725). S726).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the MB is operating in S726 (when S726 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S728 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MB is not operating in S726 (when S726 is NO), the sub CPU 81 decrements the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) by 1 ( S727).

  After S727, if S725 is NO or if S726 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode to “3” (S728). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (rocket mode) (S729). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (in rocket) table (see FIG. 83) and, based on the internal winning combination, determines the type of pseudo bonus when winning / non-winning the pseudo bonus and winning the bonus. decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is won (S730).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S730 that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when S730 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S732 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S730 that the sub CPU 81 has won the pseudo bonus (when S 730 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) (S731). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (pseudo bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 99 to 101), determines whether or not the XR mode wins and wins based on the pseudo bonus lottery mode and the pseudo bonus winning type. The XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) of the hour is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S731, or when S730 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling time processing (S732). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo bonus ceiling games, as in the process of S446 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 286), the sub CPU 81 A predetermined process at the time of XR winning or pseudo bonus winning is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is “0” (S733).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S733 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is not “0” (when S733 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S735 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S733 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is “0” (when S733 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs rocket mode continuous lottery processing (S734). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode continuation lottery table (see FIG. 161) and determines continuation / end of the rocket mode by lottery based on the stock status of the pseudo bonus. When the rocket mode continuation lottery is won, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the rocket mode continuation flag.

  After the process of S734 or when S733 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (ART) (S735). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and based on the current RT gaming state and internal winning combination, The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rocket mode remaining game number (the value of the rocket mode remaining game number counter) is “0” (S736).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S736 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is not “0” (when S736 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub gaming state (S737). With this process, the game in the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the in-rocket process is performed. Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-rocket processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S736 that the number of remaining rocket mode games is “0” (when S736 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1”. It is determined whether or not (S738).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S738 that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is “1” (when S738 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub gaming state (S739). With this process, the game in the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the in-rocket process is performed. Then, after the processing of S739, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-rocket processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S738 that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not “1” (when S738 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode. (S740). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a 1G continuous stock (S741).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S741 that there is no 1G continuous stock (when S741 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S742). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the process during ART shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 is performed. Then, after the processing of S742, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-rocket processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a 1G continuous stock in S741 (when S741 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmed screen state to the sub gaming state (S743). With this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 306 described later is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released to the pseudo bonus type (S744).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1G ream” in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S745). Then, after the process of S745, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-rocket process.

[BGZ medium processing]
Next, the processing during BGZ performed in BGZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0” (S751).

  In S751, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not greater than “0” (when S751 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S754 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S751 that the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0” (when S751 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a BG challenge content lottery process (S752). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181), and determines the correct answer of the BG challenge (an alternative effect) based on the value of the BG challenge mode and the internal winning combination. The content of the incorrect answer is determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (S753).

  After the processing of S753, or when S751 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BGZ extension flag is in an on state (S754). The BGZ extension flag is set to ON when a BG challenge is won in the seventh game of BGZ, that is, when a BG challenge is performed in the eighth game.

  In S754, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BGZ extension flag is on (when S754 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S759 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S754 that the BGZ extension flag is not on (when S754 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a BG challenge mode transition lottery process (S755). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge mode transition table (see FIGS. 182 to 189) and determines the BG challenge mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current BGZ mode, the internal winning combination, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S756).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S756 that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (when S756 is YES), the sub CPU 81 displays the winning result of the BG challenge mode transition lottery in the BG challenge mode (bell winning). (S757). In the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is “push order bell”, the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to in the BG challenge mode transition lottery process of S755. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in S757, the BG challenge mode 0 is set to the BG challenge mode (for bell winning). Then, after the processing of S757, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S759 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S756 that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (when S756 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the winning result of the BG challenge mode transition lottery in the BG challenge mode. (S758).

  After the processing of S757 or S758, or when S754 is YES, the sub CPU 81 clears the BGZ extension flag (S759).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (BGZ mode 2) (S760). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (see FIGS. 230 to 233) and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won or not based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of remaining BGZ games is “0” (S761). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BGZ remaining game number counter is “0”. The BGZ remaining game counter is set to an initial value “7” when the BGZ mode is set in the sub gaming state (for example, S608 in FIG. 295), and thereafter, the BGZ remaining game is set for each game in the BGZ mode. The value of the number counter is decremented by 1.

  In S761, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is not “0” (when S761 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ in-process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S761 that the number of remaining BGZ games is “0” (when S761 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0”. Is discriminated (S762).

  In S762, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0” (when S 762 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S763). Then, after the processing of S763, the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S762 that the value of the BG challenge mode is not greater than “0” (when S762 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the sub gaming state to the predetermined sub gaming state. (S764).

  Specifically, when the BGZ is the normal BGZ, in S764, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state to the sub gaming state. With this process, the normal game is started from the next game, and the normal mid-process shown in FIG. 286 is performed. If the BGZ is the ART BGZ, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state in S764. By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the process during ART shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 is performed. If there is XR stock, the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode to the sub gaming state in S764. With this process, the XR mode game is started from the next game, and the XR in-process shown in FIGS. 297 to 299 is performed.

  Then, after the processing of S794, the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ processing.

[Processing during BGZ (winning)]
Next, the BGZ (during winning) process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the “push order bell” (the internal winning combination of the winning numbers 38 to 40) is won internally and the “push order bell” is won (S771).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S771 that the determination condition of S771 is satisfied (when S771 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the BG challenge mode (for the bell winning) to the BG challenge mode (S772). Then, after the processing of S772, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S774 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S771 that the determination condition of S771 has not been satisfied (when S771 is NO), the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (for bell winning) (S773).

  After the processing of S772 or S773, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BGZ remaining game number (BGZ remaining game number counter value) is “0” (S774).

  In S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is not “0” (when S774 is NO), the process of S778 described later is performed. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S774 that the number of remaining BGZ games is “0” (when S774 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0”. Is discriminated (S775).

  In S775, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not greater than “0” (when S 775 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S778 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S775 that the value of the BG challenge mode is greater than “0” (when S775 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S776).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets BGZ in the sub gaming state (S777). By this process, the BGZ game is started again from the next game, and the BGZ in-process shown in FIG. 304 is performed.

  After the processing of S777, or when S774 or S775 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BG challenge is successful (S778).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S778 that the BG challenge has not been successful (when S778 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ (during winning) process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S778 that the sub CPU 81 has succeeded in the BG challenge (when S778 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART is operating (S779).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S779 that the ART is operating (when S779 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S781 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S779 that the sub CPU 81 is not operating the ART (when S779 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART ready state to the sub gaming state (S780). By this process, the game in the ART ready state is started from the next game, and the ART preparatory process shown in FIG. 289 is performed.

  After the process of S780, or when S779 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process when the BG challenge is successful (S781). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (BG challenge success) table (see FIG. 105), and based on the success parameter, whether or not the XR mode is successful and the XR winning opportunity parameter (1-6) ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S782). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process when the BG challenge is successful (S783). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the value of the XR winning opportunity parameter acquired in S781, determines the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode by lottery. decide. After the process of S783, the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ (during winning) process.

  As described above, in the BGZ (during winning) process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the BG challenge is successful (S778), and this determination process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for determining whether or not the BG challenge has succeeded (specific condition determination means). In the BGZ (during winning) process of the present embodiment, when the BG challenge is successful, a privilege (ART and / or XR mode) is given in the process of S780 and S781, and this process is performed by the sub-control circuit 42. It is executed by. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as a means (privilege grant means) for granting a privilege when the BG challenge is successful.

[Processing on final screen]
Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the confirmation screen mid-process performed in the confirmation screen state will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (in the confirmation screen) (S791). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table (see FIG. 81), and determines the type of pseudo bonus when winning / non-winning the pseudo bonus and winning the bonus based on the internal winning combination. Determined by

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during the confirmation screen) (S792). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table (see FIG. 88), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of the XR mode winning and the XR winning trigger parameter (1-6) ) Is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (S793). In this process, if the type of the winning pseudo bonus is “RB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (see FIGS. 202 to 205), and determines the RT gaming state and the internal Based on the winning combination, the winning / non-winning of push order navigation and the type of push order navigation are determined by lottery. When the type of the winning pseudo bonus is “Red 7 / Don BB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (red 7 / Don BB shift) table (see FIGS. 206 to 209), and determines the RT Based on the game state and the internal winning combination, the type of winning / non-winning push order navigation and push order navigation is determined by lottery. When the type of the pseudo bonus won is “XBB”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (see FIGS. 210 to 213), and determines the RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. Based on the above, the winning / non-winning push order navigation and the push order navigation type are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (S794).

  In S794, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is on (in the case of YES determination in S794), the sub CPU 81 determines the sub game state corresponding to the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released and The pseudo bonus type is set (S795). By this processing, the corresponding pseudo bonus game is started from the next game, and the corresponding sub-game state processing is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the confirmation screen return flag (S796). The confirmation screen return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the confirmation screen state after the end of the pseudo bonus. When returning to the confirmation screen state after the end of the pseudo bonus, “1” is set to the confirmation screen return flag. Is set. Then, after the processing of S796, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-confirmation screen processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S794 that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not on (when S794 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmed screen state to the sub gaming state (S797). By this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started again from the next game, and the process during the confirmed screen is performed. Then, after the process of S797, the sub CPU 81 ends the in-confirmation screen process.

[Processing during confirmation screen (winning)]
Next, the confirmation screen mid-process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the final confirmation screen process (winning) described below, the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1”, and the right reel 3R is first stopped. In this case, the BB mode pseudo bonus is set regardless of the type of the “immediate release” pseudo bonus. In other words, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 sets means for setting the BB mode pseudo bonus as the sub gaming state (special game) regardless of the type of the “immediate release” pseudo bonus won in the specific case. It also serves as a regulatory measure.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT3 gaming state (S801).

  In S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state has not shifted to the RT3 gaming state (when S801 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S806 described later. On the other hand, in S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state has shifted to the RT3 gaming state (when S801 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a confirmed screen state. (S802).

  In S802, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the confirmed screen state (in the case where S802 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the in-confirmed screen process (winning). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S802 that the sub gaming state is the confirmed screen state (when S802 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is “1”, and Then, it is determined whether or not the stop button on which the first stop operation has been performed is the right stop button 17R (S803).

  In S803, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S803 is satisfied (when S803 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a pseudo bonus in the BB mode (don BB or red 7BB) in the sub gaming state ( S804). With this process, the BB mode pseudo bonus game is started from the next game, and a process during BB shown in FIG. 308 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S804, the sub CPU 81 ends the mid-confirmation screen processing (winning). In the case where S803 is YES in the state where the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, that is, when the “immediate release” XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, the rule of the push order of the stop buttons (game characteristics) ) Is substantially ignored, the right to acquire the XBB mode is extinguished as a penalty by the processing of S804.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S803 that the determination condition of S803 is not satisfied (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined sub gaming state according to the pseudo bonus type (S805). . By this process, the type of pseudo bonus game set from the next game is started, and the corresponding sub-game state process is performed. Then, after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 81 ends the mid-confirmation screen processing (winning).

  Here, returning to S801 again, when S801 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the generated push order navigation is “medium 1st navigation” defined in the push order navigation lottery table ( S806). In step S806, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the push order navigation is not “medium 1st navigation” (in the case of NO determination in step S806), the sub CPU 81 ends the mid-confirmation screen process (winning).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the push order navigation is “medium 1st navigation” in S806 (when S806 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus in the BB mode (don BB) in the sub gaming state. Is set (S807). With this process, the BB mode pseudo bonus game is started from the next game, and a process during BB shown in FIG. 308 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S807, the sub CPU 81 ends the mid-confirmation screen processing (winning).

  Note that if the determination in S806 is YES, as described above, since a state fraud has occurred due to neglecting the navigation when the pseudo bonus is won, regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus that has been won, in the processing of S807, the sub gaming state Is shifted to the state of BB (don BB) mode. Therefore, even if the XBB mode pseudo bonus is won, the right to acquire the XBB mode is extinguished by the processing of S807 if the push order navigation of “medium 1st navigation” is ignored.

[BB processing]
Next, the processing during BB performed in the BB mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the BB in-process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 performs means for controlling the operation of the pseudo bonus game in the BB mode (first special game state) performed in the RT3 game state (predetermined replay time state) (first special game state). It also serves as a game control means.

  First, the sub CPU 81 decrements the value of the BB remaining game number counter by 1 (S811). The initial value of the BB remaining game number counter (60 games in the present embodiment) is set when the sub gaming state is set to the BB mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs set processing in the don-uneven mode (S812). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB in-game XR lottery game number table (see FIGS. 106 to 108), and based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the currently set don-match mode map number. The don-match mode (1-9) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “don-matched winning combination” (internal winning combination with winning numbers 20 to 23) (S813).

  In S813, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not “don-matched combination” (when S813 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S815 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S813 that the internal winning combination is “don-matched” (when S813 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a don-match permission flag lottery process (S814). In this process, the sub-CPU 81 refers to the BB middle donation permission flag table (see FIGS. 111 to 119), and sorts the current don-match lottery mode and the internal winning “don-alignment combination” (lower row, upper row alignment). , Diagonal alignment or middle level alignment), whether or not to stop display of the don-matched symbol combination (on / off of the don-alignment permission flag) is determined by lottery.

  After the process of S814 or when S813 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process during BB (S815). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in BB) table (see FIGS. 89 to 97), and based on the don-match mode and the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of XR mode winning and the XR winning at the time of winning are determined. Trigger parameters (1-6) are determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S816). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217) and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BB remaining game number counter is “0” (S817).

  In S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is not “0” (NO in S817), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S817 that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is “0” (when S817 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state to the sub gaming state. (S818). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and a pseudo bonus end standby process shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S818, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB processing.

[NRB middle processing]
Next, the NRB in-process performed in the NRB mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S821). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process by adding the number of bell navigations during NRB (S822). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB in-place bonus lottery table (see FIG. 123), and determines the number of bell navigation additions (including non-wins) by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs set processing in the RB mid-XR lottery mode (S823). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery game number table during NRB (see FIG. 109), and based on the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB and the currently set RB XR lottery table mode. The RB mid-XR lottery mode (0 to 10) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for the prescribed number of games during NRB (S824). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB forced shortening lottery table (see FIG. 124) and determines whether the NRB forced shortening is won or not by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the NRB specified game number forcible transfer lottery in S824 has been won (S825).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S825 that the NRB-prescribed game number forced transfer lottery has not been won (when S825 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S825 that the sub CPU 81 has won the NRB specified game number forced transfer lottery (when S825 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “10” in the RB XR lottery mode ( S826). In the present embodiment, when the NRB prescribed game number forced transfer lottery is won, even if the XR lottery mode during RB is a value other than “10”, the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is forcibly set. Set to “10”.

  After the processing of S826, or when S825 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the RB in XR lottery mode is “10” (S827). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of stay games in the NRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

  In S827, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RB XR lottery mode is not “10” (when S827 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S835 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is “10” in S827 (when S827 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the prescribed game is achieved during NRB. (S828). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the NRB prescribed game is achieved) table (see FIG. 102), and determines whether or not the XR mode wins and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning are determined by lottery. decide.

  After the processing of S828, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the NRB prescribed game is won (S829).

  In S829, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the NRB prescribed game (when S 829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S835 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S829 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the NRB prescribed game (when S829 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S830). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the processing of S830, the sub CPU 81 sets “1” to the ART return flag (S831). Next, the sub-CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery process when the NRB medium prescribed game is achieved (S832). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the XR winning opportunity parameter values (1 to 6) acquired in S828, the XR basic game number and XR in the XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process (S833). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table (see FIG. 132) and determines the table number (1 to 28) by lottery based on the transition to the SRB mode. After the processing of S833, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the RB XR lottery game number counter (S834).

  After the process of S834, or when S827 or S829 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S835). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217) and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S836).

  In S836, when the sub CPU81 determines that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (when S836 is NO), the sub CPU81 ends the NRB process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S836 that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (when S836 is YES), the sub CPU 81 decrements the value of the RB navigation remaining counter by 1 (S837). ). The RB navigation remaining counter is a counter for managing the number of times of the Bell navigation, which is the RB (NRB and SRB) mode game end condition. The initial value of the RB navigation remaining counter is RB ( Set when NRB and SRB) mode is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the RB navigation remaining counter is “0” (S838).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S838 that the value of the RB navigation remaining counter is “0” (when S838 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state to the sub gaming state ( S839). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and a pseudo bonus end standby process shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S839, the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S838 that the value of the RB navigation remaining counter is not “0” (when S838 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART return flag is on (set to 1). It is determined whether or not it is set (S840).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S840 that the ART return flag is not in the on state (when S840 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S840 that the ART return flag is on (when S840 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the SRB mode (S841). With this process, the SRB mode game is started from the next game, and the SRB in-process shown in FIG. 310 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S841, the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB in-process.

  As described above, in the NRB in-process of the present embodiment, each game and the number of bell navigations are added and lottery is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means for performing lottery for increasing the number of bell navigations (notification number increasing lottery means). In the NRB in-process of this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games), a privilege (XR mode) is given, and this process is performed by the sub-control circuit 42. Executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as a means for providing a privilege (privilege providing unit) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the NRB mode. Furthermore, in the NRB in-process of this embodiment, the number of times of bell navigation is counted, and it is determined whether or not to end the pseudo bonus based on the number of times of bell navigation (the value of the remaining RB navigation counter). These processes are executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means for counting the number of bell navigations (notification number counting means) and means for terminating the pseudo bonus based on the number of bell navigations (specific game state termination means).

[Processing during SRB]
Next, referring to FIG. 310, the SRB in-process performed in the SRB mode will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the RB in-game XR lottery game number counter (S851). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs set processing in the RB mid-XR lottery mode (S852). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery game number table during SRB (see FIG. 110), and based on the value of the XR lottery game number counter during RB and the currently set RB XR lottery table mode. Then, the XR lottery mode (0 to 7) during RB is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery processing with the ART game number added (S853). In this process, the sub-CPU 81 refers to the SRB in-game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 125 to 131), and adds the number of ART games in the RB-based XR lottery mode and the internal winning combination (non-increase number). (Including winning) is determined by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games played in the SRB mode in which the XR lottery mode during RB is “2” to “6” is set so that the number of ART games can be easily added. For example, if the number of digested games from the start of SRB mode game is 4 (the number of specific games) and the RB in XR lottery table mode is “1”, the RB in XR lottery mode is “6” ( In this case, an additional of 5 games or more is always determined for a combination other than the combination related to “don alignment” (see FIG. 130). That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games (the number of stay games) from the start of the game in the SRB mode reaches the specific number of games, it becomes easy to obtain an additional number of ART games.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is “7” (S854). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of stay games in the SRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

  In S854, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RB XR lottery mode is not “7” (when S854 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S861 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode during RB is “7” in S854 (when S854 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the prescribed game is achieved during SRB. (S855). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the SRB specified game is achieved) table (see FIG. 103), and determines whether or not the XR mode wins and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning are determined by lottery. decide.

  After the process of S855, the sub CPU81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the SRB prescribed game is won (S856).

  In S856, when the sub CPU81 determines that the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the SRB prescribed game has not been won (when S856 is NO), the sub CPU81 performs the process of S861 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S856 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery at the time of achievement of the SRB prescribed game (when S856 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S857). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the processing of S857, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery processing when the prescribed game is achieved during SRB (S858). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the XR winning opportunity parameter values (1 to 6) acquired in S855, the number of XR basic games and the XR in the XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process (S859). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table (see FIG. 132) and determines the table number (1 to 28) by lottery based on the transition to the SRB mode. After the processing of S859, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the RB XR lottery game number counter (S860).

  After the process of S860, or when S854 or S856 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S861). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217) and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S862).

  In S862, when the sub CPU81 determines that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (when S862 is NO), the sub CPU81 ends the SRB in-process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S862 that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (when S862 is YES), the sub CPU 81 decrements the value of the RB navigation remaining counter by 1 (S863). ). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the RB navigation remaining counter is “0” (S864).

  In S864, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RB navigation remaining counter is not “0” (when S 864 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the SRB processing.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the remaining RB navigation counter is “0” in S864 (when S864 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end standby state in the sub gaming state. (S865). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started from the next game, and a pseudo bonus end standby process shown in FIG. 312 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S865, the sub CPU 81 ends the SRB in-process.

  As described above, in the SRB in-process according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games or the number of specific games), the bonus (XR mode win or ART game number This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (privilege grant means) for granting a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the SRB mode.

[Processing during XBB]
Next, the processing during XBB performed in the XBB mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the XBB in-process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 performs means for controlling the operation of the pseudo bonus game in the XBB mode (second special game state) performed in the RT3 game state (predetermined replay time state) (second special game). It also serves as a game control means.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (S871). In this process, if it is determined that the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT3 gaming state (state fraud occurrence), it is determined that the start command has been zeroed due to fraud as described above. .

  In S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (when S871 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S883 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not other than the RT3 gaming state in S871 (when S871 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is “don-matched fake rip” (winning numbers 17 to 19). It is determined whether or not it is an internal winning combination) or “don-matched lip” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 23) (S872).

  In S872, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S872 is not satisfied (when S872 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S880 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S872 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S872 (when S872 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XBB continuous lottery process (S873). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuation lottery table (see FIG. 120) and, based on the internal winning combination, determines the type (1 or 2) of the continuation parameter at the time of XBB continuation winning / non-winning and winning. Determined by

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XBB continuous lottery has been won (S874).

  In S874, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB continuous lottery has not been won (when S874 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S881 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S874 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XBB continuous lottery (when S874 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XBB continuous XBB stock lottery process (S875). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuation time XBB stock table (see FIG. 121), and based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation winning flag (continuation parameter), Non-winning is determined by lottery.

  After the processing of S875, the sub CPU 81 performs XBB continuation XR lottery processing (S876). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (XBB continuation) table (see FIG. 104), and sets the XR winning trigger parameter based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation winning flag (continuation parameter). Determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XBB lottery during XBB continuation has been won (S877).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S877 that the XBB lottery during XBB continuation has not been won (when S877 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S881 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S877 that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery during the XBB continuation (when S877 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S878). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 151 and 152), and determines the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

  After the process of S878, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process (S879). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 139), and based on the value of the XR winning opportunity parameter acquired in S876, determines the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode by lottery. decide. Then, after the process of S879, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S881 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S872 again, if S872 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a continuous stock lottery process during XBB (normal) (S880). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuous stock lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 122) and determines the number of XBB mode stock (including non-winning) by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

  After the process of S879 or S880, or when S874 or S877 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (during pseudo bonus) (S881). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) table (see FIGS. 214 to 217) and determines whether or not the push order navigation is won based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to continue the XBB mode (S882).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB mode is continued in S882 (when S882 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the XBB process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB mode is not continued in S882 (when S882 is NO), or when S871 is YES, the sub CPU 81 gives a pseudo bonus in the BB mode to the sub gaming state. Set (S883). By this process, the BB mode pseudo bonus game is started from the next game, and the BB in-process shown in FIG. 308 is performed. Then, after the processing of S883, the sub CPU 81 ends the XBB processing.

  Note that if the determination in S871 is YES, that is, if the start command is determined to have occurred due to fraudulent behavior, the sub CPU 81 takes the sub gaming state from the pseudo bonus in the XBB mode as a penalty. Forcibly shift to the BB mode pseudo bonus. By this processing, the gaming right in the XBB mode is lost, so that, for example, unauthorized addition during the XBB mode can be prevented. Further, in the process of S893 performed when S871 is YES, the sub CPU 81 does not shift the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Therefore, in this case, the BB processing is performed in the RT gaming state other than the RT3 gaming state.

[Pseudo bonus end waiting process]
Next, the pseudo bonus end waiting process performed in the pseudo bonus end waiting state will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART return flag is “1” (ON state) (S891).

  In S891, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART return flag is not “1” (when S 891 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S893 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S891 that the value of the ART return flag is “1” (when S891 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the ART flag (S892).

  After the process of S892 or when S891 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) (S893). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery (waiting for the completion of pseudo bonus) table (see FIG. 82) and, based on the internal winning combination, determines the type of bonus winning / non-winning and pseudo bonus by lottery. decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus lottery has been won (S894).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S894 that the pseudo bonus lottery has not been won (when S894 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S896 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that the sub CPU 81 has won the pseudo bonus lottery (when S894 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets “1” in the confirmation screen return flag (S895).

  After the process of S895 or when S894 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (while waiting for a pseudo bonus) (S896). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (pseudo bonus end waiting) table (see FIG. 98), and determines the XR mode winning / non-winning and XR winning trigger parameters by lottery based on the internal winning combination. To do.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (S897). In this process, if the value of the ART return flag is “1”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 194 to 197), and determines the current RT gaming state and internal winning combination. Based on the above, the winning / non-winning push order navigation and the push order navigation type are determined by lottery. If the value of the ART return flag is “0”, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 190 to 193), and based on the current RT gaming state and the internal winning combination. The type of push order navigation winning / non-winning and push order navigation is determined by lottery. Then, after the process of S897, the sub CPU 81 ends the pseudo bonus end waiting process.

[Processing during pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (winning)]
Next, the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) in-process (winning) performed in the pseudo bonus in the BB mode, the NRB mode, or the SRB mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a pseudo bonus end standby state (at the end of the pseudo bonus) (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is not the pseudo bonus end standby state (when S901 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) in-process (winning). To do.

  On the other hand, in S901, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub gaming state is the pseudo bonus end standby state (when S901 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (during winning) (S902). ). Details of the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S902, the sub CPU 81 ends the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) in-process (winning).

[Processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning) will be described. The process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize) is a process called also in S902 during the process (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (S911). That is, in this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a state fraud (RT gaming state inconsistency) has occurred.

  In S911, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not other than the RT3 gaming state (when S911 is NO), that is, when the state fraud has not occurred, the sub CPU 81 adds a pseudo bonus to the sub gaming state. An end standby state is set (S912). By this process, the game in the pseudo bonus end standby state is started again from the next game, and the pseudo bonus end standby process shown in FIG. 312 is performed. Then, after the process of S912, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning). When the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize) is called from the process (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo bonus after the process of S912. The process at the end (at the time of winning) ends, and the process (winning) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in step S911 that the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (in the case where S911 is YES), that is, if a state fraud has occurred, Thereafter, the winning process in the bonus end waiting state is performed. In this process, even when the RT gaming state is transitioned to an abnormal state (when push order navigation is ignored), the normal sub gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state is set (sub gaming state) To return to normal.) Although not shown, if S911 is YES, the sub CPU 81 also performs a process of setting 20 games in the normal penalty counter as a penalty process.

  When S911 is YES, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the confirmation screen return flag is in an on state (S913).

  In S913, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the confirmation screen return flag is in the ON state (when S913 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of the pseudo bonus stock to be released as a pseudo bonus. The type is set (S914). After the processing of S914, the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmed screen state to the sub gaming state (S915). With this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process during the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 306 is performed. Then, after the process of S915, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning). When the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize) is called from the process (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo bonus after the process of S915. The process at the end (at the time of winning) ends, and the process (winning) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S913 that the confirmation screen return flag is not on (when S913 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery transition process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) (S916). . In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo bonus lottery mode transition (pseudo bonus end) table (see FIGS. 136 to 138) and refers to the current pseudo bonus lottery mode and pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end). Based on the above, the type of the destination pseudo bonus lottery mode is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ lottery game number table lottery process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) (S917). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 179), and based on the previous BGZ lottery game number table and the pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end). The BGZ lottery table number (1-15) is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return flag is on (S918).

  In S918, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is not in the on state (when S 918 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S924 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S918 that the ART return flag is on (when S918 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub gaming state (S919). By this process, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the process during ART shown in FIGS. 291 to 293 is performed.

  After the processing of S919, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stock is larger than “0” (S920).

  In S920, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stock is larger than “0” (when S 920 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S923 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S920 that the number of XR priority stock is not greater than “0” (when S920 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of normal stock is greater than “0”. Is determined (S921).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S921 that the number of normal stocks is not greater than “0” (when S921 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S923 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S921 that the number of normal stocks is greater than “0” (when S921 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the normal stock priority flag (S922).

  After the process of S922, if S920 is YES, or if S921 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (S923). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (pseudo bonus end) table (see FIGS. 242 to 245), and determines the number of precursor games (0 to 64 games) based on the stock type to be released. Determined by Then, after the processing of S923, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning). When the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning) is called from the process (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo bonus after the process of S923. The process at the end (at the time of winning) ends, and the process (winning) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) also ends.

  Here, returning to S918 again, if S918 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub gaming state to the normal state (S924). With this process, the normal game is started from the next game, and the normal mid-process shown in FIG. 286 is performed. Then, after the process of S924, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning). When the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning a prize) is called from the process (winning) (see FIG. 313) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) (see FIG. 313), the sub CPU 81 executes the pseudo bonus after the process of S924. The process at the end (at the time of winning) ends, and the process (winning) during the pseudo bonus (BB / NRB / SRB) also ends.

[Property control task]
Next, the accessory control task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In the accessory control task, the production operations of the central movable unit 105 (central accessory), the left movable unit 106 (left door accessory), and the right movable unit 107 (right door accessory) are controlled.

  In this embodiment, this accessory control task is repeated at a cycle of 10 msec including the processing time. When the sub CPU 81 directly controls the movable accessory, the accessory control task is executed at a cycle of 1 msec to the minimum value (3 msec) of the pulse width of the accessory movable data.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory activation test process (S931). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks the operation of each movable accessory when the power is turned on, and checks whether each movable accessory has returned to the origin position (initial position) at the end of the operation confirmation sequence. The details of the accessory activation test process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is registered (set) accessory data (S932). Note that the accessory data is registered in the sub RAM 83 in the effect registration task shown in FIG.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S932 that there is registered accessory data (when S932 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S934 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no registered accessory data in S932 (when S932 is NO), the sub CPU 81 stores the call sign for moving the accessory in the call sign storage area. It is determined whether or not (S933).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the “moving out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is performed after the OFF edge of the third stop operation is detected, the second in the effect sequence data displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the next game. (3) A call sign for storing an accessory designated by a central accessory storage instruction is associated (linked) with a predetermined image frame from the time when the OFF edge of the stop operation is detected until the end of the game. Therefore, if a call sign for storing an accessory designated by the central accessory storage instruction is stored as a call sign for moving an accessory in the call sign storage area, the process of S933 is YES.

  In S933, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a call sign for moving an accessory (for example, a call sign for storing an accessory designated by a central accessory storage instruction) is not stored in the call sign storage area (S933: NO determination) In this case, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S935 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S933 that the data for moving an accessory is stored in the call sign storage area (when S933 is YES), or when S932 is YES, the sub CPU 81 The accessory movable data corresponding to the accessory data or the feature movable call sign is acquired (S934).

  In the process of S934, for example, the action movable data for effect driving of the central movable unit 105 (hereinafter referred to as central character movable data), the action movable data for effect driving of the left movable unit 106 (hereinafter, left door role). Object movable data), and the accessory movable data for effect driving of the right movable unit 107 (hereinafter referred to as right door accessory movable data) are acquired. When the production of the central movable unit 105 is the “jumping” production, in the process of S934, the movable item movable data for the “jumping” production of the central movable unit 105 (hereinafter, referred to as the central joke pop-out data) is obtained. To be acquired. Further, if the call sign storing instruction designated for storing the central character is stored in the call sign storage area, the central movable unit 105 (movable decorative cover 323) is moved to the origin position (initial position) in the process of S934. ) For moving operation to be returned to () is acquired.

  After the process of S934, or when S933 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory control process (S935). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs an output process of the movable object movable data to the movable unit drive circuit and a monitoring process of the operation state of the movable movable object to be controlled. In the present embodiment, the drive control of the stepping motor of each movable accessory is performed by the corresponding movable unit drive circuit (the accessory control board). Details of the accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S935, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S932, and repeats the processing after S932.

[Activity start test process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the accessory activation test process performed in S931 in the accessory control task (see FIG. 315) will be described. In the present embodiment, the activation test of the movable accessory is simultaneously performed on the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 by parallel processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the activation test for each movable accessory may be sequentially performed in units of one unit.

  Note that the accessory activation test process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (operation check means at start-up) for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in various moveable accessories by checking the movement operation of the various moveable accessories at the time of start-up. . In the accessory activation test process described below, when an error of a movable accessory occurs at the time of activation, error occurrence information of the movable accessory is registered in the error information history. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (error registration means) for registering the error occurrence information of the movable accessory at the time of activation in the error history information.

  First, the sub CPU 81 obtains accessory movement data for an accessory activation test (S941). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 obtains the accessory movable data (excitation pulse application pattern data) in the “activation test” column in the accessory movable data table of each movable accessory shown in FIGS. 13 and 20.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory control data output process (S942). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the movable accessory data acquired in S941 to the corresponding movable unit drive circuit (the accessory control board) by serial communication. When the sub CPU 81 directly controls the driving of the movable accessory, in the process of S942, the sub CPU 81 determines the accessory in the “activation test” column in the accessory movable data table shown in FIGS. 13 and 20. The movable data is output directly to the movable accessory. With this process, a start test of each movable accessory is started.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory movable state update process for a predetermined movable accessory (S943). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 updates the position information of the predetermined movable accessory based on the count number of excitation pulses applied to the predetermined movable accessory, etc. On the other hand, predetermined drive control corresponding to the start-up test is performed. In the start-up test for each movable accessory, each movable accessory is finally driven and controlled in an operation pattern in which each movable accessory returns to the origin position.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the activation test for all movable accessories has been completed (S944). In S944, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activation test for all the movable accessories has not ended (when S944 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S943 and repeats the processes after S943.

  On the other hand, in S944, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activation test for all the movable accessories has been completed (when S944 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (whether or not the right door 189 has returned to the origin position) (S945).

  In S945, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is not in the on state (when S945 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S945 that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is on (when S945 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is It is determined whether or not it is in an on state (whether or not the left door 188 has returned to the origin position) (S946).

  In S946, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is not on (when S946 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S946 that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is on (when S946 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is on. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (whether or not the movable decorative cover 323 has returned to the origin position) (S947).

  In S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central agent origin sensor is not in the ON state (when S947 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S948 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S947 that the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is on (when S947 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory activation test process and performs the process. The process moves to S932 in the accessory control task (see FIG. 315).

  If S945, S946, or S947 is NO, that is, if the movable accessory has not finally returned to the origin position in the start-up test, the sub CPU 81 provides information indicating that a movable accessory error has occurred (“YAKUMONO ERR ") is registered in the error information history (S948).

  Here, FIG. 317 shows a configuration example of an error information history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This error information history screen is displayed when an error information history is selected in the simple menu displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by turning the door key counterclockwise. As shown in FIG. 317, the error information history displays various types of error information in chronological order, and each error information includes information such as error contents and date of occurrence. Further, in the error information history, various information such as occurrence of power interruption (“POWER DOWN”) and power interruption recovery (“POWER UP”) are recorded as well as error information of the movable accessory.

  After the process of S948, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory activation test process, and moves the process to S932 in the accessory control task (see FIG. 315). As described above, in the present embodiment, when a movable accessory error occurs in the movable accessory activation test, the common error occurrence information (“YAKUMONO ERR”) is displayed as an error regardless of the type of the movable accessory. Register in the information history. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate error occurrence information may be defined for each movable accessory type, and the error occurrence information for each movable accessory may be separately registered in the error information history. In this case, it is possible to easily identify the type of movable accessory in which an error has occurred.

[Accessory control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the accessory control process performed in S935 in the accessory control task flowchart (see FIG. 315) will be described.

  In addition, in the accessory control process described below, when the accessory movable data is set for a predetermined movable accessory, the accessory movable data is output to the predetermined movable accessory. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (control data output means) for outputting the accessory movable data (control data) to the movable accessory. In addition, in the accessory control process described below, if an error of a movable accessory occurs during the start operation for five consecutive games, the driving of the movable accessory is prohibited. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 is a means for prohibiting the driving of the movable accessory when the occurrence of the error of the movable accessory is detected during the start operation continuously over five unit games ( Also serves as a drive prohibition means. In the accessory control process described below, the above-described special process that is performed when the next game is started during the “jump out” effect of the central movable unit 105 is also executed (S951 to S957 and S962, which will be described later). . That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 executes the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105 when the next game is started when the next game is started during the “jumping” effect of the central movable unit 105. Means (first movement control data output means) for outputting the movable article movable data to the central movable unit 105, and the movable article movable data for returning the central movable unit 105 to the origin position after the “jumping” effect. It also serves as means for outputting to the movable unit 105 (second movement control data output means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the central command pop-out confirmation request is set when the start command is received (S951).

  In S951, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S951 is not satisfied (when S951 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S954 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S951 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S951 (when S951 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is in an ON state. (S952).

  In S952, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central agent origin sensor is not on (when S952 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S954 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S952 that the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is in the ON state (when S952 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the central actor pop-out data to the accessory movable data. (First movement control data) is registered (S953). After the process of S953, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S962 described later.

  When S951 or S952 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is any registered (set) accessory data (S954). Note that the accessory data is registered in the sub RAM 83 in the effect registration task shown in FIG.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S954 that there is an accessory data (YES in step S954), the sub CPU 81 performs processing in step S958 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S954 that there is no accessory data (NO in S954), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the start command is received or whether the central accessory storage instruction is designated. It is determined whether or not an accessory storage call sign is stored in the call sign storage area (S955).

  In S955, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S955 is not satisfied (when S955 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S963 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S955 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S955 (when S955 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the central movable unit 105 is based on the information (position information) related to the accessory movable state. It is determined whether or not the movable decorative cover 323 (the central accessory) is in a state of protruding to the front of the liquid crystal screen (S956).

  In S956, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the movable decorative cover 323 (central accessory) is not in a state of projecting to the front of the liquid crystal screen (when S 956 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S963 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S956 that the movable decorative cover 323 (central accessory) is in a state of projecting to the front surface of the liquid crystal screen (when S956 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the accessory movable data. Central accessory storage data (second movement control data) is registered in (S957). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the excitation pulse application pattern data defined in the “storage” column in the central accessory movable data table shown in FIG. 20 as the accessory movable data. Then, after the process of S957, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S962 described later.

  Here, returning to S954 again, if S954 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the right door accessory error counter is “5” or more, or the value of the left door accessory error counter is It is determined whether or not “5” or more (S958).

  In S958, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S958 is not satisfied (when S958 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S960 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S958 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S958 (when S958 is YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes the left door accessory movable data and the right door accessory movable data (S959). ). That is, in the case where an error occurs at the start operation continuously five times (5 games) in the left movable unit 106 (left door accessory) or the right movable unit 107 (right door accessory), the process of S959 is performed. The left movable unit 106 (left door accessory) and the right movable unit 107 (right door accessory) are prohibited from being driven.

  After the process of S959 or when S958 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the central character error counter is “5” or more (S960).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S960 that the value of the central actor error counter is not equal to or greater than “5” (when S960 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S962 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S960 that the value of the central actor error counter is “5” or more (when S960 is YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes the central actor movable data (S961). ). That is, in the case where an error occurs during the start operation continuously five times (five games) or more in the central movable unit 105 (central role), the central movable unit 105 (central role) is driven by the process of S961. Is prohibited.

  After the processing of S953, S957, or S961, or when S960 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory control data output process (S962). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory movable data registered for each movable accessory to the corresponding movable unit drive circuit (the accessory control board) by serial communication. When the sub CPU 81 directly controls the movement of the movable accessory, the sub CPU 81 directly outputs the accessory movable data to the movable accessory in the process of S962.

  After the process of S962, or when S955 or S956 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory operation monitoring process (S963). The details of the accessory action monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory movable state update process (S964). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 updates the position information of each movable accessory based on the count number of excitation pulses and the like. When the detection result of the movable accessory origin sensor is in the on state, the sub CPU 81 resets the position information of the corresponding movable accessory to the origin position (initial position). Then, after the process of S964, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory control process and moves the process to S932 in the accessory control task (see FIG. 315).

[Functional action monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the accessory operation monitoring process performed in S963 in the flowchart of the accessory control process (see FIG. 318) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a start command is received (S971).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that the start command is not received (when S971 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S973 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that the start command is being received (when S971 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory operation start monitoring process (S972). The details of the accessory action start monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321 described later.

  After the process of S972, or when S971 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the accessory movable state is the state where the operation has ended (S973). In S973, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the accessory movable state is not the operation end state (when S973 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation monitoring process, and the process is controlled by the accessory control process ( The process proceeds to S964 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S973 that the accessory movable state is the operation end state (in the case where S973 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory operation end monitoring process (S974). Details of the accessory operation end monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S974, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation monitoring process, and moves the process to S964 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 318).

[Functional action start monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 320 and FIG. 321, the accessory action start monitoring process performed in S972 in the flowchart of the accessory action monitoring process (see FIG. 319) will be described.

  Note that the accessory operation start monitoring process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 confirms the operation status of various movable accessories at the time of starting the game and detects whether or not an error has occurred in the various movable combinations (operation confirmation at the start). Means). In addition, in the accessory action start monitoring process described below, when an error occurs in a movable accessory during a start operation for five consecutive games, the driving prohibition information of the movable accessory is registered in the error information history. . That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 42 also serves as means (error registration means) for registering the driving prohibition information of the movable accessory in the error history information.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection result of the central agent origin sensor is in an off state (S981).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S981 that the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is not in the off state (when S981 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the central actor error counter. (S982). Then, after the processing of S982, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S986 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S981 that the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is in the OFF state (when S981 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the central actor error counter to “5”. It is determined whether it is less than (S983). In S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central actor error counter is not less than “5” (when S 983 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S986 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S983 that the value of the central actor error counter is less than “5” (when S983 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the central actor error counter to “1”. "Is added (S984). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the central character error counter is “5” or more (S985).

  In S985, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the central character error counter is “5” or more (when S 985 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S996 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S985 that the value of the central actor error counter is not equal to or greater than “5” (when S985 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S986 described later.

  After the processing of S982, or when S983 or S985 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is in an off state (S986).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S986 that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is not in the off state (when S986 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the right door accessory error counter to “0”. Set (S987). After the process of S987, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S991 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S986 that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is OFF (when S986 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door accessory error counter is “ It is determined whether it is less than 5 ”(S988). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door accessory error counter is not less than “5” in S988 (when S988 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S991 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door accessory error counter is less than “5” in S988 (when S988 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right door accessory error counter value to the value of the right door accessory error counter. “1” is added (S989). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the right door accessory error counter is “5” or more (S990).

  In S990, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the right door accessory error counter is “5” or more (when S 990 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S996 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S990 that the value of the right door accessory error counter is not “5” or more (when S990 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S991 described later.

  After the processing of S987, or when S988 or S990 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is in an off state (S991).

  In S991, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is not in the off state (when S991 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the value of the left door accessory error counter. Set (S992). Then, after the process of S992, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory action start monitoring process, and moves the process to S973 in the accessory action monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S991 that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is in an off state (when S991 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door accessory error counter is “ It is determined whether or not it is less than 5 ”(S993). In S993, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door accessory error counter is not less than “5” (when S993 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation start monitoring process and performs the process. The process moves to S973 in the accessory operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door accessory error counter is less than “5” in S993 (when S993 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the left door accessory error counter to the value of the left door accessory error counter. “1” is added (S994). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the left door accessory error counter is “5” or more (S995).

  In S995, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the left door accessory error counter is “5” or more (when S995 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S996 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S995 that the value of the left door accessory error counter is not equal to or greater than “5” (when S995 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation start monitoring process, The process moves to S973 in the accessory operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  When S985, S990, or S995 is YES, the sub CPU 81 registers the accessory error stop information (“YAKUMONO STOP”) in the error information history (see FIG. 317) (S996). That is, when an error of a movable accessory occurs at the start operation for five consecutive games, the driving prohibition information of the movable accessory is registered in the error information history. After the process of S996, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory action start monitoring process, and moves the process to S973 in the accessory action monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

  In the error information history registration process, even if an error of a movable accessory occurs during a start operation for six or more consecutive games, the accessory error stop information (driving prohibition information) of the movable accessory is stored in the error information history. Not registered. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, after the feature error stop information of the central feature is registered in the error information history, the feature error stop information of the right movable feature or the left movable feature is registered in the error information history. There is also a case. In such a case, in any registration process, the common accessory error stop information (“YAKUMONO STOP”) is registered in the error information history regardless of the type of the movable accessory. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate accessory error stop information (driving prohibition information) is defined for each movable accessory type, and the accessory error stop information of each movable accessory is separately stored in the error information history. You may make it the structure registered into. In this case, it is possible to easily identify the type of movable accessory whose driving is prohibited.

[Functional action completion monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the accessory action end monitoring process performed in S974 in the flowchart of the accessory action monitoring process (see FIG. 319) will be described.

  In the accessory action end monitoring process described below, if the predetermined movable accessory has not returned to the origin position at the end of the production, the origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the predetermined movable accessory to the origin position Is output to a predetermined movable accessory. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as means (origin return control data output means) for outputting origin return assist data (origin return assist control data) to the movable accessory.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the right door accessory movable data is accessory movable data that finally returns the right door 189 to the home position (initial position) (S1001).

  In S1001, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right door accessory movable data is not the accessory movable data that finally returns the right door 189 to the origin position (when S1001 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the SCPU is described later. Perform the process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1001 that the right door accessory movable data is the accessory movable data that finally returns the right door 189 to the origin position (when S1001 is YES), the sub CPU 81 It is determined whether or not the position of the right door 189 is the origin position based on information (position information) about the movable state of the right movable unit 107 (S1002).

  In S1002, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the right door 189 is not the origin position (when S1002 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1005 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1002 that the position of the right door 189 is the origin position (when S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 81 indicates that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is OFF. Is determined (S1003).

  In S1003, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is not in the OFF state (when S 1003 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S1005 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1003 that the detection result of the right door accessory origin sensor is OFF (when S1003 is YES), the sub CPU 81 outputs the right door accessory origin return auxiliary data output process. (S1004). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the right door 189 to the origin position (initial position) to the right movable unit drive circuit 98. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory movable data that causes the right door 189 to rotate 60 excitation pulses in the direction toward the origin position (the closing direction) to the right movable unit drive circuit 98. To do. Then, after the processing of S1004, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S1005 described later.

  After the process of S1004, or when S1001, S1002, or S1003 is NO, the sub CPU 81 is the movable object movable data in which the left door movable object movable data finally returns the left door 188 to the origin position (initial position). Whether or not (S1005).

  In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left door accessory movable data is not the accessory movable data for finally returning the left door 188 to the origin position (in the case where S1005 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs S1009 described later. Perform the process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1005 that the left door accessory movable data is the accessory movable data that finally returns the left door 188 to the origin position (when S1005 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Whether the position of the left door 188 is the origin position or not is determined based on information (position information) on the movable state of the accessory of the left movable unit 106 (S1006).

  In S1006, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the left door 188 is not the origin position (when S 1006 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1009 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1006 that the position of the left door 188 is the origin position (when S1006 is YES), the sub CPU 81 indicates that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is in the off state. Whether or not (S1007).

  In S1007, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the left door accessory origin sensor is not in the off state (when S1007 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1009 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1007 that the detection result of the left door feature origin sensor is in the off state (when S1007 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs left door feature origin return auxiliary data output processing. (S1008). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the left door 188 to the origin position (initial position) to the left movable unit drive circuit 97. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory movable data that causes the left door 188 to rotate 60 excitation pulses in the direction toward the origin position (the closing direction) to the left movable unit drive circuit 97. To do. Then, after the processing of S1008, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S1009 described later.

  After the processing of S1008, or when S1005, S1006, or S1007 is NO, the sub CPU 81 serves to return the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to the origin position (initial position) finally with the central accessory movable data. It is determined whether or not the object movement data (S1009).

  In S1009, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the central accessory movable data is not the accessory movable data for finally returning the movable decorative cover 323 to the origin position (when S1009 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the accessory operation. The end monitoring process ends, and the accessory action monitoring process (see FIG. 319) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1009 that the central accessory movable data is the accessory movable data that finally returns the movable decorative cover 323 to the origin position (when S1009 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Based on the information on the movable state of the accessory (position information) of the central movable unit 105, it is determined whether or not the position of the movable decorative cover 323 (central accessory) is the origin position (S1010).

  In step S1010, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the position of the movable decorative cover 323 is not the origin position (in the case where S1010 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation end monitoring process and the accessory operation monitoring process. (See FIG. 319) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1010 that the position of the movable decorative cover 323 is the origin position (when S1010 is YES), the sub CPU 81 indicates that the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is in an off state. Is determined (S1011).

  In step S1011, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection result of the central accessory origin sensor is not in the off state (in the case where S 1011 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation end monitoring process and performs the accessory operation. The monitoring process (see FIG. 319) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1011 that the detection result of the central actor origin sensor is in an off state (when S1011 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs central actor origin return auxiliary data output processing. (S1012). In this process, the sub CPU 81 outputs the accessory origin return auxiliary data for forcibly returning the movable decorative cover 323 of the central movable unit 105 to the origin position (initial position) to the central movable unit drive circuit 96. Specifically, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 81 outputs the movable article movable data to the central movable unit drive circuit 96 such that the movable decorative cover 323 moves by 115 excitation pulses in the direction toward the origin position (storage direction). To do. Then, after the processing of S1012, the sub CPU 81 ends the accessory operation end monitoring process and also ends the accessory operation monitoring process (see FIG. 319).

[Anime task]
Next, an animation task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In the animation task, operation control of various image display effects by the liquid crystal display device 11 is performed.

  In the animation task described below, the sub control circuit 42 detects a call sign for storing an accessory and stores it in the call sign storage area. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (movement command information storage means) for detecting and storing in the call sign storage area a call sign for storing an accessory designated by the central accessory storage instruction.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for extracting animation data registered (set) in the sub RAM 83 (S1021). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether animation data is registered (S1022).

  In S1022, when the sub CPU 81 determines that animation data is not registered (in the case where S1022 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S1024 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1022 that animation data has been registered (when S1022 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an effect setting process (S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 81 acquires image (moving image) data (effect pattern sequence data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and sets the image data in an effect sequence management area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. To do.

  After the process of S1023 or when S1022 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect sequence update process (S1024). In the processing of S1024, the sub CPU 81 updates the effect timeline and changes the start position of the effect sequence to a position corresponding to the received command when various events occur (when various commands are received).

  In the process of S1024, if there is a call sign for moving an accessory associated with the image frame of the effect sequence data in the current effect timeline, the sub CPU 81 detects the call sign for moving the accessory. And store (set) it in the call sign storage area. In the present embodiment, for example, if the image frame of the current production timeline is associated with the central agent storage call sign designated by the central accessory storage instruction as the accessory movable call sign, the processing of S1024 , A process for detecting a call sign for storing an accessory designated by the central accessory storage instruction and a process for storing it in the call sign storage area are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a guide menu main process (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs display / non-display operation control of the guide menu (see FIG. 14) in the liquid crystal display device 11. Details of the guide menu main process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a billy touch input process (S1026). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a player pressing operation (touch input) on the left effect switch 22L or the right effect switch 22R, and the type of the effect switch that is touch-input. Perform discrimination processing and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs animation processing (S1027). In this processing, the sub CPU 81 performs, for example, 2D animation processing (moving image data reproduction control processing), 3D animation processing (display control of various effects displayed three-dimensionally), and the like. Then, after the process of S1027, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S1021, and repeats the processes after S1021.

[Guide menu main process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the guide menu main process performed in S1025 in the animation task flowchart (see FIG. 323) will be described.

  The guide menu main process described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 displays guidance information (various information such as a payout table and various menus) regarding game contents when the specific operation by the player is detected during non-game. It also serves as a means for displaying (guidance information display means).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a game is in progress (S1031). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1031 that the game is being played (when S1031 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process and moves the process to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323). . On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the sub CPU 81 is not playing a game (NO in S1031), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the guide menu (see FIG. 14) is being displayed (S1032). .

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1032 that the guide menu is being displayed (YES in step S1032), the sub CPU 81 performs processing in step S1037 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1032 that the guide menu is not being displayed (when S1032 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B has been pressed by the player. It discriminate | determines (S1033).

  In S1033, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B is not pressed (when S1033 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process, and the process is an animation task (FIG. (See 323). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1033 that the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B has been pressed (when S1033 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the left door accessory origin sensor and the right door accessory origin sensor. Status information (ON or OFF) is acquired (S1034).

  After the processing of S1034, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the detection results of the left door accessory origin sensor and the right door accessory origin sensor are in the on state (S1035). In S1035, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the detection results of the left door accessory origin sensor and the right door accessory origin sensor are not on (when S1035 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process. Then, the process proceeds to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323). That is, when the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B is pressed by the player (when the player performs a guide menu display operation), the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are brought to the origin position. When it is not returned (when the door accessory is in operation), the guide menu is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1035 that the detection results of the left door accessory origin sensor and the right door accessory origin sensor are on (when S1035 is YES), the sub CPU 81 displays the guide menu. A display request is made (S1036). That is, when the SELECT button 19A or the ENTER button 19B is pressed by the player (when the player performs a guide menu display operation), the doors of the left movable unit 106 and the right movable unit 107 are brought to the origin position. If it is back, a guide menu is displayed. Then, after the process of S1036, the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process, and moves the process to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323).

  Here, returning to S1032 again, if S1032 is YES, the sub CPU81 performs a guide menu process corresponding to the player's operation (S1037). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a guide menu end condition is satisfied (S1038). In the present embodiment, the guide menu end condition is satisfied when a bet operation, a lever operation (start operation), or a selection operation of “return to game” is performed on the guide menu screen.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that the guide menu end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1038), the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process, and the process is an animation task (see FIG. 323). ) To S1026. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that the guide menu end condition is satisfied (YES in S1038), the sub CPU 81 issues a guide menu end request (S1039). Then, after the process of S1039, the sub CPU 81 ends the guide menu main process, and moves the process to S1026 in the animation task (see FIG. 323).

  The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine called “pachinko”, and the same effect can be obtained. can get.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display Device: 16 ... Start lever, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 19A ... SELECT button, 19B ... ENTER button, 22L, 22R ... Production switch, 41 ... Main control circuit, 42 ... Sub-control circuit, 50 ... Microcomputer, 51 ... Main CPU, 52 ... Main ROM, 53 ... Main RAM, 56 ... Random number generator, 81 ... Sub CPU, 82 ... Sub ROM, 83 ... Sub RAM, 105 ... Moveable centrally Unit: 106 ... Left movable unit, 107 ... Right movable unit, 188 ... Left door, 189 ... Right door, 302 ... Decoration Dynamic member, 323 ... movable decorative cover, 324 ... arch cover

Claims (3)

A movable decorative portion that performs a predetermined movement operation;
A display device for displaying images;
A control unit that performs control related to the presentation of the gaming machine,
The controller is
Determine a specific effect for moving the movable decorative portion from the origin position to the front of the display device,
If the next unit game is started before the moving operation of the movable decoration part to the front of the display device is executed in the predetermined unit game in which the specific effect is determined, Triggering the start of a unit game, moving the movable decorative part from the origin position to the front of the display device,
In the predetermined case, the movable decorative portion located on the front surface of the display device is moved to the origin position at a predetermined timing or the start of a unit game as a trigger. . 2. The game according to claim 1, wherein in the next unit game, the control unit triggers a predetermined operation, and moves the movable decoration unit to the origin position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the trigger. Machine. During the execution of the next unit game, the movable decoration portion located on the front surface of the display device, which is associated with a predetermined image frame in the effect video displayed by the display device, is moved to the origin position. A movement command information storage means for storing movement command information for
In the next unit game, when the movement command information stored by the movement command information storage unit is detected in the next unit game, the control unit sets the movable decoration unit to the origin position. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine is moved.

Images